PLM300 Plant Maintenance C

I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300Plant Maintenance

mySAP Product Lifecycle Management

Date

Training Center

Instructors

Education Website

Participant HandbookCourse Version: 2003 Q2Course Duration: 5 Day(s)Material Number: 50066011

An SAP course - use it to learn, reference it for work

I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Copyright

Copyright © 2003 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purposewithout the express permission of SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changedwithout prior notice.

Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary softwarecomponents of other software vendors.

Trademarks

� Microsoft®, WINDOWS®, NT®, EXCEL®, Word®, PowerPoint® and SQL Server® areregistered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

� IBM®, DB2®, OS/2®, DB2/6000®, Parallel Sysplex®, MVS/ESA®, RS/6000®, AIX®, S/390®,AS/400®, OS/390®, and OS/400® are registered trademarks of IBM Corporation.

� ORACLE® is a registered trademark of ORACLE Corporation.� INFORMIX®-OnLine for SAP and INFORMIX® Dynamic ServerTM are registered

trademarks of Informix Software Incorporated.� UNIX®, X/Open®, OSF/1®, and Motif® are registered trademarks of the Open Group.� Citrix®, the Citrix logo, ICA®, Program Neighborhood®, MetaFrame®, WinFrame®,

VideoFrame®, MultiWin® and other Citrix product names referenced herein aretrademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc.

� HTML, DHTML, XML, XHTML are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, WorldWide Web Consortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology.

� JAVA® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.� JAVASCRIPT® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license

for technology invented and implemented by Netscape.� SAP, SAP Logo, R/2, RIVA, R/3, SAP ArchiveLink, SAP Business Workflow, WebFlow,

SAP EarlyWatch, BAPI, SAPPHIRE, Management Cockpit, mySAP.com Logo andmySAP.com are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and inseveral other countries all over the world. All other products mentioned are trademarksor registered trademarks of their respective companies.

Disclaimer

THESE MATERIALS ARE PROVIDED BY SAP ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, AND SAP EXPRESSLYDISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR APPLIED, INCLUDINGWITHOUT LIMITATION WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR APARTICULAR PURPOSE, WITH RESPECT TO THESE MATERIALS AND THE SERVICE,INFORMATION, TEXT, GRAPHICS, LINKS, OR ANY OTHER MATERIALS AND PRODUCTSCONTAINED HEREIN. IN NO EVENT SHALL SAP BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OF ANYKIND WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOST REVENUES OR LOSTPROFITS, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OF THESE MATERIALS OR INCLUDEDSOFTWARE COMPONENTS.

I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

About this HandbookThis handbook is intended to complement the instructor-led presentation ofthis course, and serve as a source of reference. It is not suitable for self-study.

Typographic ConventionsThe following typographic conventions are used in this guide.

Type Style Description

Example text Words or characters that appear on the screen.These include field names, screen titles,pushbuttons as well as menu names, paths, andoptions.

Also used for cross-references to otherdocumentation both internal (in thisdocumentation) and external (in other locations,such as SAPNet).

Example text Emphasized words or phrases in body text, titlesof graphics, and tables

EXAMPLE TEXT Names of elements in the system. These includereport names, program names, transaction codes,table names, and individual key words of aprogramming language, when surrounded by bodytext, for example SELECT and INCLUDE.

Example text Screen output. This includes file and directorynames and their paths, messages, names ofvariables and parameters, and passages of thesource text of a program.

2003/Q2 © 2003 SAP AG. All rights reserved. iii

I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

About this Handbook PLM300

Type Style Description

Example text Exact user entry. These are words and charactersthat you enter in the system exactly as they appearin the documentation.

<Example text> Variable user entry. Pointed brackets indicatethat you replace these words and characters withappropriate entries.

Icons in Body TextThe following icons are used in this handbook.

Icon Meaning

For more information, tips, or background

Note or further explanation of previous point

Exception or caution

Procedures

Indicates that the item is displayed in theinstructor�s presentation.

iv © 2003 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2003/Q2

I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

ContentsCourse Overview...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii

Course Goals.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .viiCourse Objectives .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .vii

Unit 1: SAP Enterprise Navigation ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1SAP R/3 Interface.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2Using Help .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Personalizing User Settings .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Unit 2: Plant Maintenance Organization..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Overview of Plant Maintenance System ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Organizational Structure in Plant Maintenance System .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Connecting to an SAP R/3 Enterprise .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Unit 3: Technical Objects ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Functional Locations ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Equipment .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77Bills of Material. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Unit 4: Breakdown Maintenance ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101Processing Breakdown Maintenance Orders ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102Confirming and Completing Orders ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

Unit 5: Corrective Maintenance ...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125Corrective Maintenance Process ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127Notification of Maintenance Requirements ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130Planning of Orders.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146Scheduling Maintenance Tasks.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175Executing Maintenance Tasks ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195Completing Notifications and Orders.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205Purchasing External Services.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229Explaining Mobile Solutions .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262

Unit 6: Refurbishment of Spare Parts ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277Refurbishment and Material Master Details.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278

2003/Q2 © 2003 SAP AG. All rights reserved. v

I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Contents PLM300

Unit 7: Preventive Maintenance ...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311Preventive Maintenance Process.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312Preventive Maintenance Task Lists... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316Preventive Maintenance Planning .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322Scheduling Maintenance Plans .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344

Unit 8: Project-Oriented Maintenance ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361Project-Oriented Maintenance Process... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362

Unit 9: Work Clearance Management ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373Explaining Work Clearance Management ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374

Unit 10: Reports and Analysis..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383Maintenance History .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384Evaluations based on Logistics Information System ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389Evaluations based on Business Information Warehouse.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400

Appendix 1: Plant Maintenance: Solution Manager, Technology, andTransaction Codes ...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409

Index ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433

vi © 2003 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2003/Q2

I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Course OverviewThis course will enable you to obtain an overview of Plant Maintenanceand recognize the important business processes in it. It also enables you toperform analyses and evaluations and understand the integration of PlantMaintenance with other SAP applications.

Target AudienceThis course is intended for the following audiences:

� Project team managers� Employees from the project team involved in modeling the business

processes in Plant Maintenance� Decision-makers responsible for selecting EDP-supported maintenance

systems

Course PrerequisitesRequired Knowledge

� Basic knowledge and experience of the business processes in PlantMaintenance

Recommended Knowledge

� SAP01 - mySAP.com Overview� SAPPLM - Overview of the mySAP PLM Solution

Course GoalsThis course will prepare you to:

� Obtain an overview of Plant Maintenance� Recognize the most important business processes in Plant Maintenance� Perform analyses and evaluations� Understand the integration of Plant Maintenance with other SAP

applications

2003/Q2 © 2003 SAP AG. All rights reserved. vii

I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Course Overview PLM300

Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, you will be able to:

� Apply the various business processes of Plant Maintenance effectively� Identify Plant Maintenance as an integral part of Product Lifecycle

Management

SAP Software Component InformationThe information in this course pertains to the following SAP SoftwareComponents and releases:

viii © 2003 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2003/Q2

I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 1SAP Enterprise Navigation

Unit OverviewAt the end of this unit, you will be able to identify the elements of a standardwindow and navigate an SAP R/3 Enterprise. You will also be able to usebasic help functions and personalize your user settings.

Unit ObjectivesAfter completing this unit, you will be able to:

� Identify the steps to log on to an SAP R/3 Enterprise� Identify the interface elements of an SAP R/3 Enterprise� Identify the Help menu� Access the SAP Library� Identify the different methods of personalizing an SAP R/3 Enterprise

Unit ContentsLesson: SAP R/3 Interface .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2Lesson: Using Help... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Exercise 1: Using SAP R/3 Enterprise ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Lesson: Personalizing User Settings .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Exercise 2: Customizing User Settings... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

2003/Q2 © 2003 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 1

I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 1: SAP Enterprise Navigation PLM300

Lesson: SAP R/3 Interface

Lesson OverviewThis lesson will help you to log on to an SAP R/3 Enterprise. You will also beable to identify the interface elements of an SAP R/3 Enterprise.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Identify the steps to log on to an SAP R/3 Enterprise� Identify the interface elements of an SAP R/3 Enterprise

Business ExampleAn automobile company has implemented SAP R/3 Enterprise. The usersare new and need to familiarize themselves with the system screens and itsinterface elements.

Logging onto an SAP R/3 Enterprise

Figure 1: Logging Onto The System

The SAP R/3 Enterprise is known as a client system. The client conceptenables you to run several separate business operations at the same time onone SAP R/3 Enterprise. Each user session can only access data on the client

Continued on next page

2 © 2003 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2003/Q2

I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Lesson: SAP R/3 Interface

that you selected when you logged on. In organizational terms, a client is anindependent unit in the system. A Client has its own data environment thatincludes the user master and transaction data, assigned user master records,and chart of accounts. In addition, each client has specific customizingparameters.

The SAP Business Information Warehouse (BW) and SAP KnowledgeWarehouse (KW) components are, however, exceptions to this as only a singleclient can be used.

To log onto an SAP R/3 Enterprise, you must have a user master recordcreated for you for the corresponding client. You must enter a password whenyou log onto the SAP R/3 Enterprise for access protection. The system doesnot display the password that you enter.

SAP R/3 Enterprise are available in several languages. You can use theLanguage input field to select the logon language for each session.

Multiple logons are possible in SAP R/3 Enterprise starting from the Release4.6. This is for security as well as licensing reasons. A warning messageappears if the same user attempts to log on two or more than two times. Thismessage offers the user three options:

� Continue with this logon and end any other logons in the system.� Continue with this logon, without ending any other logons in the system

(this will be logged in the system).� Terminate this logon.

You can place your own text on the initial screen in a number of ways. Formore information, see SAP Note 205487.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 2: SAP Easy Access

After you logon to the SAP R/3 Enterprise, the standard entry screen calledSAP Easy Access is displayed. You navigate through the system using a treestructure.

You can include an image, such as your company logo on the right-handside of the SAP Easy Access screen. This image can only be enteredsystem-wide and is a cross-client setting. Assuming you have the appropriateauthorization, you can find a detailed description of the necessary settingsby choosing Extras→ Administration Information. It is important to note thatthis image is stored in the system and transported to the SAP front end everytime it is called by SAP Easy Access. Although this transfer is compressed,the image for the initial screen should not exceed 20 KB. You can prevent thisimage being called either by using the setting Low Speed Connection in the SAPLogon program (see SAP Note 161053) or by deactivating the calling of theimage by choosing Extras→ Settings



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


SAP Enterprise Menu

Figure 3: Role-Based User Menu

A role describes suitably defined number of activities in the system. Theseactivities represent a range of functions that the users need for work. In orderto enable its users to work with user-specific or position-relatedmenus, userroles need to be set. User roles can be set using Profile Generator of the SAPR/3 Enterprise. The authorization for the activities listed in the menu optionsare also assigned to the users on the basis of their roles. Predefined user rolesfrom all application areas are included in the standard system. Users whohave been assigned a user role can choose between the user menu and the SAPstandard menu. You can find the roles that are supplied in a standard SAPR/3 Enterprise by choosing Other menu on the SAP Easy Access initial screen.

Every user can personalize the initial screen using Favorites. You can createyour own Favorites list containing the transactions, reports, files, and Webaddresses that you use most often.

You can add favorites either by choosing Favorites or by using the mouse to�drag and drop� items into the Favorites directory.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Interface Elements

Figure 4: Elements of the Screen Layout

The elements of an SAP R/3 Enterprise screen layout are:

Command field: The command field, which is hidden by default, helps youaccess the applications directly by entering the transaction code. You can findthe transaction code for an application in the SAP Easy Accessmenu or in theappropriate application by choosing System→ Status.

Standard toolbar: The pushbuttons in the standard toolbar are found onevery screen in an SAP R/3 Enterprise. Any pushbuttons that cannot beused in a particular application are grayed out. If you place your cursor ona pushbutton for some time, the system displays a quick information textexplaining the functions of that pushbutton. The appropriate function keysetting is also displayed here.

Application toolbar: The application toolbar displays the functions availablein the current application.

Checkboxes: The checkboxes enable you to choose several optionssimultaneously within a group.

Radio buttons: The radio buttons allow you to choose exactly one item from aselection.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Tab page: The tab page provides a clear overview of several informationscreens.

Status bar: The status bar displayes information on the current system status,such as warning or error messages.

Other elements of the screen are:

Menu bar: The menus displayed on the screen depend on the application youare working on. These menus contain cascading menu options.

Title bar: The title bar displays the functions that are available for the user.

Figure 5: Selecting Functions

You can call functions in the system in the following ways:

By using the mouse. You can use the mouse to access the functions in thesystem through:

� Menu option� Favorites� Entry in the SAP Easy Access menu

By using the keyboard (Alt + the underlined letter in the appropriate menuoption)

By entering a transaction code in the command field: A transaction code isassigned to each function but not every screen in SAP R/3 Enterprise. Youcan display the appropriate transaction code from each screen in the system.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


For example, to display the customer master data, enter /n and then enter theappropriate transaction code - /nsu3. You can determine the transaction codeby choosing System→ Status. Additional input options include:

� �/n� ends the current transaction� �/i� deletes the current session� �/osm04� opens a new session and branches to the transaction specified

(SM04).

The command field can also be called using keyboard commands. To do this,use the keyboard combinations Strg+Tab. The cursor moves from the currentinput field to the next input field. You can use Tab to move within an inputfield group.

By entering �search_sap_menu� in the command field, you can display menupaths for the desired SAP transactions. You can also search for text strings.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Identify the steps to log on to an SAP R/3 Enterprise� Identify the interface elements of an SAP R/3 Enterprise



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson: Using Help

Lesson OverviewThis lesson will help you identify the Help menu of an SAP R/3 Enterprise.You will also learn how to access the SAP Library.


� Identify the Help menu� Access the SAP Library

Business ExampleAn automobile company has implemented SAP R/3 Enterprise. The users arefamiliar with the screens and interface elements. However, they get stuckwhile accessing the enterprise at times. To resolve the queries about Enterpriseusage, they need to access online help and the SAP Library.

Help Menu

Figure 6: Menus: System and Help



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Lesson: Using Help

SAP R/3 Enterprise provides comprehensive online help. You can displaythe help from every screen in the system by choosing the menu option Help.Alternatively, you can also use the yellow question mark icon displayed onthe screen to display the help documentation.

The Help menu consists of the following menu options:

� Application Help, which is context-sensitive� SAP Library� Glossary

Figure 7: Field Help: F1 and F4

You can use F1 to display an explanation of the fields, menus, functions, andmessages. F1 Help also provides technical information on the relevant field.This also includes, the parameter Ids, which you can use to assign values foryour user to input fields for reference to the parameter IDs.

You can use F4 to display possible input values. F4 can also be accessed for aselected field by using the button displayed on the right-hand side of that field.

If input fields are marked with a checkmark icon, then you can only continuein that application by entering a permitted value. You can identify manyfields in an application as either required entry fields or optional entry fieldsby using transaction variants, screen variants, or customizing settings.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


SAP Library

Figure 8: SAP Library

SAP Library enables you to access help documentation in HTML formatand perform efficient full-text searches. You can access the SAP Libraryquickly and comfortably by using the SAP Service Marketplace. In SAP ServiceMarketplace, you can access the SAP Help Portal in the Knowledge and Trainingsection.

You can also take advantage of these options within your own company if theSAP Library is installed on your systems.

You can access the SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com.



http://help.sap.com

I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 1: Using SAP R/3 Enterprise

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Log onto an SAP R/3 Enterprise� Find transaction codes� Access the SAP Library� Use F1 Help to find field information� Use F4 Help to search for possible field entries

Business ExampleAny new user of an SAP R/3 Enterprise can navigate through the systemusing this functionality. The user can also access the various types of onlinehelp and can carry out commands with which he might not be familiar. Theuser can navigate through the SAP R/3 Enterprise using menu paths andtransaction codes.

Task 1Logging on to the system

1. Select the appropriate system for this training course. Use the client, username, initial password and logon language specified by the instructor.When logging on for the first time, a window appears in which you mustenter your new password twice. Make a note of the following:

Client:______ User:__________ Password:__________ Language:______

Task 21. What is the maximum number of sessions (windows in the SAP R/3

Enterprise) you can have open simultaneously? Number:__

Task 31. Identify the functions and find the transaction codes that correspond to

the following menu paths in the SAP standard menu.

Tools→Administration→Monitor→ SystemMonitoring→User OverviewNameof function: ___________________________________________Transaction:_________________________________________________




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Task 4Using Help

1. If you choose Application help in the SAP Easy Access initial screen(Help menu), which area of the SAP Library does it take you to?

2. Use the system menu or transaction code SU3 to call the user datamaintenance function. Call F1 Help for various different input fields.Use Technical Information to find the parameter ID for the field LogonLanguage.

Display F4 Help for the field Logon Language. What is the languagecode for Ukranian?

3. Display the transaction code for the transaction you are currently in, inthe status bar.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 1: Using SAP R/3 EnterpriseTask 1Logging on to the system

1. Select the appropriate system for this training course. Use the client, username, initial password and logon language specified by the instructor.When logging on for the first time, a window appears in which you mustenter your new password twice. Make a note of the following:

Client:______ User:__________ Password:__________ Language:______

a) Log on to the system indicated by the instructor and change yourpassword.

Task 21. What is the maximum number of sessions (windows in the SAP R/3

Enterprise) you can have open simultaneously? Number:__

a) To open and close sessions, choose

System→ Create session (or use the appropriate pushbutton) andSystem→Delete session. The maximum number of sessions you canhave open simultaneously is six, depending on your system settings.

Task 31. Identify the functions and find the transaction codes that correspond to

the following menu paths in the SAP standard menu.

Tools→Administration→Monitor→ SystemMonitoring→User OverviewNameof function: ___________________________________________Transaction:_________________________________________________

a) To find the transaction code, choose System→Status These functionnames and transaction codes correspond to the menu paths:SM04for function User list

Task 4Using Help




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


1. If you choose Application help in the SAP Easy Access initial screen(Help menu), which area of the SAP Library does it take you to?

a) The unit Getting Started is displayed, detailing the informationrequired when using SAP Easy Access.

2. Use the system menu or transaction code SU3 to call the user datamaintenance function. Call F1 Help for various different input fields.Use Technical Information to find the parameter ID for the field LogonLanguage.

Display F4 Help for the field Logon Language. What is the languagecode for Ukranian?

a) The Logon language field is found on the Fixed values tab page.Use F1 Help and select Technical info to see the parameter ID forthis field in string SPR.

Proceed as detailed in the exercise. The language code for Ukrainianis UK.

3. Display the transaction code for the transaction you are currently in, inthe status bar.

a) In the status bar, use the pushbutton to select the display optionyou require and choose Transaction. For each of the transactionsyou call, the appropriate transaction code is displayed in the statusbar for the session.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Identify the Help menu� Access the SAP Library



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson: Personalizing User Settings

Lesson OverviewThis lesson will help you identify the different ways in which you canpersonalize an SAP R/3 Enterprise.


� Identify the different methods of personalizing an SAP R/3 Enterprise

Business ExampleIn an automobile company, the SAP R/3 Enterprise users are familiar withthe screens and interface elements. They can use online help and SAP library.They now need to personalize the user settings on the system for theirconvenience.

Methods to Personalize the User Settings

Figure 9: User-Specific Personalization



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Lesson: Personalizing User Settings

The end user has many possibilities for personalizing the system. Someof these are:

You can alter the layout of your initial screen by selecting Extras→ Settings.For example, by switching off the image in the right-hand part of the window,you can display the technical names (transaction codes) in the SAP EasyAccess menu.

You can activate the Quick Cut and Paste function under Customizing of locallayout. Under Options, you can influence the reaction time of the quickinformation that is displayed when you move your mouse over an icon orpushbutton.

You can define your personal default values by selecting System→ Userprofile→ Own data. When doing so, you can choose between the tab pages,Address Defaults and Parameters. As an example, the setting of Parameters isexplained here:

Parameters: Here you can set defaults for frequently used input fields. Inorder to be able to set a default value for a field, it must have been assigneda parameter ID first.

Procedure for finding the parameter ID: Go to the field for which you wishto set a default value. Select F1 Help and then choose Technical Info. Thesystem displays an information window that contains the relevant parameterID under the heading Field Data (as long as the field has been assigned aparameter ID.)



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 2: Customizing User Settings

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Set a user parameter for a field� Set user defaults� Maintain your favorites� Select a start transaction of your choice

Business ExampleAny person working on SAP Enterprise can customize the system settings asper his requirements using this functionality. He can personalize the settingsto make it more convenient for himself.

Task 1Define user-specific settings using System→User Profile→ Own Data.

1. Set your logon language to the value used for this course.

2. Set the decimal notation and date format of your choice.

Task 2Defining your favorites:

1. Insert at least one new folder under the Favorites folder.

2. Add any two of your favorite transactions to the corresponding folders.

3. Add the Internet address http://www.sap.com with the text �SAPHomepage.�

Task 3Setting a start transaction using the Extras menu.

1. Enter a transaction of your choice as the initial transaction. You will thenneed to log off and on again for the change to take effect.

Note: If desired, you can change the initial transaction back tothe default value simply by deleting the transaction code thatyou entered.



http://www.sap.com

I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 2: Customizing User SettingsTask 1Define user-specific settings using System→User Profile→ Own Data.

1. Set your logon language to the value used for this course.

a) To define the logon language, go to the user settings (System→User profile→ Own data) and go to tab page Fixed values. Enter thelanguage of your choice.

2. Set the decimal notation and date format of your choice.

a) See above

Task 2Defining your favorites:

1. Insert at least one new folder under the Favorites folder.

a) To add favorites to your favorites list, create a folder: Favoriteslist→ Create folder. Enter a name for the folder. You can create asmany folders as you require. You can move folders using the dragand drop function.

2. Add any two of your favorite transactions to the corresponding folders.

a) To create favorites, select specific applications (transactions) in themenu tree of the standard menu, that are your favorites (thoseapplications that you use daily). By selecting an application andthen choosing, Favorites list→ Create favorites, you can add entriesto your favorites lists. You can move favorites into folders later bychoosing Favorites→Move. You can move folders using the dragand drop function.

3. Add the Internet address http://www.sap.com with the text �SAPHomepage.�

a) Add Internet addresses by selecting Favorites→ Add other objects.

Task 3Setting a start transaction using the Extras menu.




http://www.sap.com

I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


1. Enter a transaction of your choice as the initial transaction. You will thenneed to log off and on again for the change to take effect.

Note: If desired, you can change the initial transaction back tothe default value simply by deleting the transaction code thatyou entered.

a) Choose Extras→ Set start transaction.

Enter the transaction you require and choose Enter. Notice thesystem message on the status bar indicating that your selectedtransaction has been set as the start transaction.

Note: To change back to the SAP Easy Access as the initialscreen, follow the menu path again, delete the transactioncode and select Enter. The next time you log on, SAP EasyAccess will be the initial screen.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Identify the different methods of personalizing an SAP R/3 Enterprise



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Unit Summary

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Identify the steps to log on to an SAP R/3 Enterprise� Identify the interface elements of an SAP R/3 Enterprise� Identify the Help menu� Access the SAP Library� Identify the different methods of personalizing an SAP R/3 Enterprise



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit Summary PLM300



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Test Your Knowledge

Test Your Knowledge

1. Currently, you do not have access to the SAP R/3 Enterprise of yourcompany. In order to log onto the Enterprise, you need to get a usermaster record created for yourself.Determine whether this statement is true or false.

TrueFalse

2. As a system administrator, you have been asked to display the screenlogo on the SAP Easy Access screen of the Enterprise. You can find thedetailed description of the necessary settings by choosing Extras→Administration Information.Determine whether this statement is true or false.

TrueFalse

3. You are logged onto the SAP R/3 Enterprise. Application Help canbe used at all times of your session to display information about thesignificant interface elements.Determine whether this statement is true or false.

TrueFalse

4. You are a new user to an SAP R/3 Enterprise and access it over theinternet. Your employer has asked you to collect some informationabout various SAP components. The easiest and the fastest wayto search for information related to SAP components is by usingSAP Library SAP Library.Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence.

5. System→ User Profile→ Own data can be used to define default values.Determine whether this statement is true or false.

TrueFalse



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Test Your Knowledge PLM300

Answers

1. Currently, you do not have access to the SAP R/3 Enterprise of yourcompany. In order to log onto the Enterprise, you need to get a usermaster record created for yourself.

Answer: True

For logging onto an SAP R/3 Enterprise, you need to get a user masterrecord created for yourself for the corresponding client.

2. As a system administrator, you have been asked to display the screenlogo on the SAP Easy Access screen of the Enterprise. You can find thedetailed description of the necessary settings by choosing Extras→Administration Information.

Answer: True

You can find the detailed description of the necessary settings fordisplaying your company logo on the SAP Easy Access from thefollowing menu path: Extras→ Administration Information.

3. You are logged onto the SAP R/3 Enterprise. Application Help canbe used at all times of your session to display information about thesignificant interface elements.

Answer: True

Application Help for an SAP R/3 Enterprise is context-sensitive.

4. You are a new user to an SAP R/3 Enterprise and access it over theinternet. Your employer has asked you to collect some information aboutvarious SAP components. The easiest and the fastest way to search forinformation related to SAP components is by using SAP Library.

Answer: SAP Library



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


5. System→ User Profile→ Own data can be used to define default values.

Answer: True

One of the possibilities of personalizing settings for your system is bychoosing the System→ User Profile→ Own data menu path. This pathenables you to define personal default values.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit Summary PLM300



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 2Plant Maintenance Organization

Unit OverviewIn this unit, you will be able to list the different types of maintenanceperformed. This unit will enable you to describe the range of solutions inwhich the Plant Maintenance component is incorporated. Finally, you willbe able to list the organizational units relevant to Plant Maintenance froman SAP Enterprise


� Identify the various activities performed in a Plant Maintenance process� Identify Product Lifecycle Management and Asset Lifecycle Management

with respect to Plant Maintenance� List the organizational levels in a Plant Maintenance component� Define the various organizational units in a Plant and Cross-plant

Maintenance system� Define maintenance work centers and their role and functions in Plant

Maintenance� Identify the activities and settings for the implementation of application

components using the Implementation Guide (IMG)� Identify the various methods of connecting to an SAP R/3 Enterprise

Unit ContentsLesson: Overview of Plant Maintenance System.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Lesson: Organizational Structure in Plant Maintenance System... . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Exercise 3: Understanding Organizational Structures in PlantMaintenance.. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Lesson: Connecting to an SAP R/3 Enterprise .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53


I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 2: Plant Maintenance Organization PLM300

Lesson: Overview of Plant Maintenance System

Lesson OverviewIn this lesson, you will get an overview of the Plant Maintenance process. Youwill also be able to identify the various tasks used to maintain a technicalsystem. In addition, you will get a brief overview of the Product LifecycleManagement (PLM) and Asset Lifecycle Management (ALM).

Finally, you will be able to identify a range of solutions offered by SAP.


� Identify the various activities performed in a Plant Maintenance process� Identify Product Lifecycle Management and Asset Lifecycle Management

with respect to Plant Maintenance

Business ExampleA company wants to implement a SAP process that will enable its users torepair and inspect technical objects, and perform preventive maintenance.

The Plant Maintenance process of SAP enables its users to perform suchactivities.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Lesson: Overview of Plant Maintenance System

Plant Maintenance Process

Figure 10: Types of Maintenance

Maintenance of a technical system comprises of the following tasks:

� Inspection: To determine the actual condition.� Maintenance: To maintain the target condition.� Repair: To restore the target condition.

The maintenance organizations usually perform other technical activities,which do not belong to Plant Maintenance, but should be performed using thesame tools of maintenance order, planning, and processing. These activitiesinclude:

� Modification or construction� Cleaning� Revisions� Tool assembly and erection of fixtures� Production assistance



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 11: Plant Maintenance Process Overview

Overview of Product Lifecycle Management

Figure 12: Range of Solutions Offered by SAP

SAP provides cross-industry and industry-specific solutions for theprocess-oriented representation of business cases.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


A solution contains a combination of application and basis componentsselected in line with a specific business aim.

Figure 13: Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)

Product Lifecycle Management (PLM) views the lifespan of a product from amanufacturers� perspective.

Plant Maintenance and service represent the final phase of a product�s lifespan.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 14: Asset Lifecycle Management

Asset Lifecycle Management views the lifespan of a product from theperspective of the company operating it as a technical system to be maintained.

Plant Maintenance (PM) and Customer Service (CS) are integral componentsof Asset Lifecycle Management.

Figure 15: Plant Maintenance Integration



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


The component, SAP PM Plant Maintenance, as part of Product LifecycleManagement has manifold integration aspects. Information on the integrationaspects can be found in the following courses:

� Materials Management� Controlling� Financial Accounting - In this course, relevant information can be found

in:� Asset Accounting in Course PLM305� Production and HR System in Course PLM315� Investment and Project Management in Course PLM316� Real Estate Management in Course AC290� Funds Management in Course IPS910� Joint Venture is part of the Industry Solution IS-Oil and must be installed

separately. Integration with the standard system is planned. You can findinformation about these components in SAPNet.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Identify the various activities performed in a Plant Maintenance process� Identify Product Lifecycle Management and Asset Lifecycle Management

with respect to Plant Maintenance



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Lesson: Organizational Structure in Plant Maintenance System

Lesson: Organizational Structure in Plant MaintenanceSystem

Lesson OverviewIn this lesson, you will be able to list the various organizational levels andunits in a Plant Maintenance system. You will also be able to identify the roleof maintenance work centers and their functions in Plant Maintenance.

Finally, you will be able to identify the activities and settings required forimplementing an application component using the Implementation Guide(IMG).


� List the organizational levels in a Plant Maintenance component� Define the various organizational units in a Plant and Cross-plant



components using the Implementation Guide (IMG)

Business ExampleA company has implemented the SAP Plant Maintenance component. Thecompany wants to decide on centralization or decentralization of its activities.The Plant Maintenance component of SAP R/3 Enterprise enables its users toidentify organizational levels and units that enable such decisions.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Organizational Levels

Figure 16: Organizational levels

Step 1: The Plant Maintenance (PM) component is often only installed afterother components, such as Financial Accounting, Controlling, MaterialsManagement, and so on. This means that the company structure is, to a largeextent, already defined in the system. Now the existing structure must beanalyzed from a plant maintenance perspective and extended to include themaintenance-specific parts. If the Plant Maintenance (PM) component is thefirst SAP component installed, a structure that works for all the remainingareas of the company should be defined in the system.

Step 2: After an in-depth analysis, the organizational units relevant for PlantMaintenance are defined in the system: Maintenance plants. These unitsusually exist as logistical plants, and maintenance planning plants, planningplants for short, are defined in the company structure.

Step 3: This is where the maintenance planner groups are assigned to planningplants and maintenance work centers are assigned to maintenance plants.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Organizational Units

Figure 17: Organizational Structures in Plant Maintenance

The organizational structure in Maintenance Plants is as follows:

The client is the highest-level element of all the organizational units. Itcorresponds, for example, to a corporate group with several subsidiaries.Within a client, the system always accesses the same database. Thesubsidiaries with their own financial statements and balance sheets are definedas company codes. Within Logistics, the plant is one of the most importantorganizational units. It usually represents a production unit of a company.

The plant at which the operational systems of a company are installed is calledthe maintenance plant. If the maintenance work is planned at this plant, themaintenance plant is also the maintenance planning plant, planning plantfor short. Locations subdivide a maintenance plant according to locationalcriteria, for example, site, building, coordinates. A maintenance plant can alsobe subdivided into plant sections based on responsibility for production. Theperson responsible for the plant section is the contact person who coordinatesproduction and maintenance, who is often the plant engineer.

The units of capacity in Plant Maintenance are managed as maintenance workcenters, which are assigned to the respective maintenance plant as workshops.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Amaintenance planning plant is the organizational unit in which maintenancerequirements are planned. These requirements can either come from yourown plant or from another maintenance plant assigned to this maintenanceplanning plant. The planners within a maintenance planning plant are definedby maintenance planner groups.

Figure 18: Cross-Plant Maintenance

Plant-specific planning: Maintenance plant = planning plant. In mostorganizational structures, the maintenance requirement is planned in the sameplant where it occurs, the maintenance orders are executed by workshopsfrom the same plant, and the spare parts are stored in the same plant, suchas plant 1000.

Cross-plant planning: Multiple maintenance plants are assigned to a planningplant. In one plant, such as plant 1200, there is a need for maintenance, asa technical system there requires maintenance (= maintenance plant). Allfurther functions, such as maintenance planning, order execution, spare partsstorage, are, however, the responsibility of another plant.

Other constellations are also conceivable: The planning of a plant�srequirements, such as plant 1300, as well as the spare parts procurement takeplace in another plant, such as plant 1000. However, the tasks are performedby workshops available locally.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Work Centers

Figure 19: Maintenance Work Centers

A work center is an organizational unit within an operational system. A workcenter can be one of the following:

� Machine� Group of machines� Person� Group of people

In Plant Maintenance, work centers are used as:

- Main work center in the master record for the equipment or functionallocation.

- Main work center in a maintenance item.

- Main work center in the task list header.

- Performing work center in the operations for a task list.

- Main work center in the order header.

- Performing work center in the operations for an order.

Work centers belong to the master data and provide the capacity requiredto perform a task.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 20: Work Centers: Contents

The basic data contains general data such as work center category, description,manager and the usage.

Work center links provide the connection between work centers and otherobjects within the SAP Enterprise. You can link a work center with thefollowing objects:

- A cost center

- Qualifications

- Positions

- People

The links are valid for certain periods of time.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 21: Work Center: Main Functions

The Work Center has several functions as follows:

Costing: You can use costing to determine the costs of an internal activity by aproduct unit. Its goal is to assign to the various cost objects the costs that wereincurred by them. If the work center is used in an operation, the link to thecost center provides activity types for valuating the operation.

Scheduling: You can use scheduling to determine the dates when operationsshould be performed. For this, the time required for the operations must becalculated and compared with the time available in the work center. Thestandard values and quantities in the operations are used as the basis for thiscalculation. During scheduling, the start and end dates for the operationsare calculated from this data using formulae that have been entered forscheduling in the work centers.

Capacity planning: In capacity planning, the capacity requirements for theoperations in the orders are determined and compared with the availablecapacity defined in the work center. During capacity planning, you canuse work center hierarchies to aggregate, at higher-level work centers, theavailable capacity and capacity requirements of lower-level work centers.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


The Implementation Guide in an SAP R/3 Enterprise

Figure 22: Implementation Guide (IMG)

The Implementation Guide contains all the activities and settings,Customizing activities, that are required to implement applicationcomponents.

You can create Customizing projects in an SAP Enterprise and use themto structure and manage the implementation. You can create and savecross-project documentation.

You can create a separate IMG for each project.

On the basis of a project IMG, you can work on Customizing transactions,project documentation, cross-project documentation, and information onproject management.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 23: Customizing � Customer-Specific Settings

The IMG represents a checklist for the Customizing activities that a companyshould perform when implementing an SAP R/3 Enterprise. The IMG isstructured hierarchically.

The IMG structure and the tools for IMG management, for example, resourcemanagement and the interface to Microsoft Project, help the project team towork through the Customizing activities in a systematic order.

The scope of the reference IMG can be subdivided into different projects,which are then assigned to project IMGs. You can use the project IMGto process Customizing activities, project documentation, cross-projectdocumentation, and relevant information on project management.

For better structuring, you can create views for the project IMGs. The viewsallow you to process project documentation, project-wide documentation,and relevant information on project information similar to the Project IMGCustomizing transactions.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 3: Understanding OrganizationalStructures in Plant Maintenance

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Describe the content of the work center master record� List the organizational structures in Plant Maintenance

Business ExampleAn organization needs to frame a structure for Plant Maintenance so that itcan centralize or decentralize its activity. The organization basically needs twoentities, Maintenance plant and Planning plant, which are location based andplanning based, respectively.

While implementing SAP Plant Maintenance at IDES, it must be clarifiedwhich organizational structures in Plant Maintenance should be represented,and how they fit into the existing structures for Logistics.

Task 1Displaying Work Center Master Data

1. Display the work center T-ME## in plant 1000.

Which menu path do you use?

Task 2Right or Wrong

1. A maintenance plant can also be a maintenance planning plant.

2. A location such as building F-141 can only exist once within the company.

3. A maintenance planner group is assigned to a maintenance planningplant.

4. A maintenance plant is assigned to a maintenance planning plant.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 3: Understanding OrganizationalStructures in Plant MaintenanceTask 1Displaying Work Center Master Data

1. Display the work center T-ME## in plant 1000.


a)

SAP menu→ Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→ MaintenanceProcessing→ Environment→Work Centers→Work Center→Display

Field name or data type Values

Person responsible for workcenter

101

Task list usage 004

Task list types Maintenance task lists / Serviceplans

Operating time/capacity 7.20h/36.00h

Cost center 4300

Activity type, internalprocessing

1410

Task 2Right or Wrong

1. A maintenance plant can also be a maintenance planning plant.

a) Right

2. A location such as building F-141 can only exist once within the company.

a) Wrong (a location is related to a plant).




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


3. A maintenance planner group is assigned to a maintenance planningplant.

a) Right

4. A maintenance plant is assigned to a maintenance planning plant.

a) Right



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� List the organizational levels in a Plant Maintenance component� Define the various organizational units in a Plant and Cross-plant



components using the Implementation Guide (IMG)



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Lesson: Connecting to an SAP R/3 Enterprise

Lesson: Connecting to an SAP R/3 Enterprise

Lesson OverviewIn this lesson, you will be able to identify the various methods used to connectto an SAP R/3 Enterprise.


� Identify the various methods of connecting to an SAP R/3 Enterprise

Business ExampleA company has implemented an SAP Plant Maintenance component. Theusers of this component need to identify the possible ways of connecting tothe component.

Methods of Connecting to an SAP R/3 Enterprise

Figure 24: SAP GUI or Portal?



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


SAP Graphical User Interface (SAP GUI) represents the traditional method ofconnecting up to a SAP R/3 Enterprise. The GUI is usually installed on thelocal work center and forms the graphical interface composed of the SAP EasyAccess, standard tool bar, and so on.

Another option for connecting to an SAP R/3 Enterprise would be to use aportal. Portals are HTML-based and allow access to almost any system, alsonon-SAP R/3 Enterprise, through the intranet or the Internet.

The portals are the next generation of the Business Workplace, which is alsoHTML-based.

However, the portals distinguish themselves from the Workplace as SAPtransactions are not translated 1:1 into HTML, but particular functions (forexample, displaying a technical object) are made available in a much moresimplified form known as Integrated Views (iViews).

This ensures that even occasional SAP users who do not have expertknowledge of the software can easily access certain functions.

The role concept supported in the SAP GUI and the Business Workplace is alsoused in the portals. A connection of the previously delivered single roles tothe iViews is planned.

Figure 25: SAP Portals: An Example



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Lesson: Connecting to an SAP R/3 Enterprise

The portals get their content though Business Packages, such as, BusinessPackage Assets � Technical objects.

These are composed of a sequence of iViews. iViews are HTML screen areas inwhich data from certain SAP transactions is read. The sequence of iViews canbe compiled flexibly to role- or function-specific screens, such as, portal formaintenance managers or maintenance engineers.

The iViews are connected amongst themselves by the eventing mechanism,that is, if a particular object is selected, all the dependent iViews areautomatically filled with the relevant data.

This means that certain information can be displayed very easily without theuser requiring extensive SAP know-how.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Identify the various methods of connecting to an SAP R/3 Enterprise



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Unit Summary

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Identify the various activities performed in a Plant Maintenance process� Identify Product Lifecycle Management and Asset Lifecycle Management

with respect to Plant Maintenance� List the organizational levels in a Plant Maintenance component� Define the various organizational units in a Plant and Cross-plant



components using the Implementation Guide (IMG)� Identify the various methods of connecting to an SAP R/3 Enterprise



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit Summary PLM300



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Test Your Knowledge

1. Shutdown maintenance function can be addressed byproject-oriented project-oriented maintenance in the Plant Maintenancemodule.Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence.

2. Asset Lifecycle Management views the lifespan of a product from amanufacturer�s perspective whereas Product Lifecycle Managementviews the lifespan of a product from the perspective of the companyoperating it.Determine whether this statement is true or false.

TrueFalse

3. A separate IMG can be created for each project.Determine whether this statement is true or false.

TrueFalse

4. In the third step of an organizational level, maintenance planner groupsare assigned to planning plants planning plants.Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence.

5. Plant Plant represents a production unit of a company.Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence.

6. Work center links provide the connection between work centers andother objects within an SAP Enterprise.Determine whether this statement is true or false.

TrueFalse



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


7. Portals get their content through Business Packages, such as BusinessPackage Assets.Determine whether this statement is true or false.

TrueFalse



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Answers

1. Shutdown maintenance function can be addressed by project-orientedmaintenance in the Plant Maintenance module.

Answer: project-oriented

2. Asset Lifecycle Management views the lifespan of a product from amanufacturer�s perspective whereas Product Lifecycle Managementviews the lifespan of a product from the perspective of the companyoperating it.

Answer: False

Product Lifecycle Management views the lifespan of a product from amanufacturer�s perspective whereas Asset Lifecycle Management viewsthe lifespan of a product from the perspective of the company operatingit as a technical system to be maintained.

3. A separate IMG can be created for each project.

Answer: True

A separate IMG can be created for each project.

4. In the third step of an organizational level, maintenance planner groupsare assigned to planning plants.

Answer: planning plants

5. Plant represents a production unit of a company.

Answer: Plant

6. Work center links provide the connection between work centers andother objects within an SAP Enterprise.

Answer: True

Work center links provide the connection between work centers andother objects within an SAP Enterprise.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


7. Portals get their content through Business Packages, such as BusinessPackage Assets.

Answer: True

Portals get their content through Business Packages, such as BusinessPackage Assets.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 3Technical Objects

Unit OverviewIn this unit, you will be able to identify the technical systems and buildingsrelevant to maintenance and need mapping in the system. You will also beable to understand the criteria of mapping, creating, and using functionallocations in the system. In addition, you will be able to identify equipmentsand learn how to install or dismantle these. Finally, you will be able to identifyBill of Materials and their application in Plant Maintenance.


� Define functional locations� Create functional locations� Identify functional location using structure indicator� Define equipment� Identify how to install and dismantle equipment� Explain the advantages of usage list� Identify the application of Bills of Material in Plant Maintenance

Unit ContentsLesson: Functional Locations .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Exercise 4: Using Functional Locations .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Lesson: Equipment ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Exercise 5: Creating Equipment... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Lesson: Bills of Material. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Exercise 6: Using Bills of Material. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93


I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 3: Technical Objects PLM300

Lesson: Functional Locations

Lesson OverviewIn this lesson, you will get an overview of functional locations. You will alsobe able to state the purpose of creating functional locations. Finally, you willlearn the use of structure indicators to identify the functional locations.


� Define functional locations� Create functional locations� Identify functional location using structure indicator

Business ExampleA company has implemented SAP Plant Maintenance component. The usersneed to map complex technical systems, such as welding, engine assembly,and vehicle assembly of the company. The Plant Maintenance processprovides functional locations objects that enable its users to map the objects inthe system.

Defining Functional Locations

Figure 26: Technical Objects: Process

For International Demonstration and Education System (IDES), you first needto decide which technical systems and buildings are relevant for maintenanceand need mapping in the system.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Lesson: Functional Locations

Use functional locations to map more complex technical systems, equipment tomap individual objects, and maintenance bills of material to map spare parts.

In International Demonstration and Education System, maintenance engineersare responsible for technical structures.

Following are the steps involved in the identification, structuring, andclassification of technical objects:

Step 1: When starting to map technical objects, you need to decide whichobjects are relevant to Plant Maintenance. In other words, which objectsrequire maintenance measures and for which objects evaluation is required.

Step 2: In the second step, you choose the structuring instruments for eachobject, that is, functional location, equipment, assembly, material, and createthe structure.

Step 3: In the third step, you create characteristics (= technical characteristics- for example, electrical output) and task list, such as pump classes. Alltechnical characteristics become available for an object when a technicalobject, such as equipment, is assigned to a class.

Figure 27: Functional Location

Functional locations are hierarchically ordered structures that represent atechnical system, building, or part thereof.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


You can structure the functional location according to spatial such as building1, building 2; technical such as press, press frame, or press hydraulics; orfunctional, that is, process-oriented criteria such as polymerization, orcondensation.

The aim of creating a functional location is to structure a technical system orbuilding into units that are relevant for Plant Maintenance.

Figure 28: Criteria for Functional Locations

You should use functional locations to structure your systems if:

� You want to represent the structures of the technical systems in yourcompany according to functional criteria.

Maintenance tasks have to be performed for individual areas in the structureof your technical system and this work must or should be recorded.

� Technical data for certain parts of your technical system has to be storedand evaluated over a long period of time.

� The costs of maintenance tasks have to be monitored for certain partsof your technical system.

� You want to analyze what effects that the usage conditions have on thelikelihood of damage to the installed equipment.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Creating Functional Locations

Figure 29: Structure Indicator

The identification for functional locations is created using the structureindicator. The structure indicator consists of two input fields: Codingtemplate and Hierarchy levels

The coding template is used to control which characters might be used foridentification, letters, numbers, or both, and how these characters are groupedtogether or split. The hierarchy levels are used to define which level ends atwhich character and how many hierarchy levels the structure might contain.

A functional location can be identified using a maximum of 40 characters,which equals the maximum length of the coding template.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 30: Master Record for Functional Location

The master record for the functional location uses the following views:

� General: Class, object type, reference data, manufacturer data, and so on.

� Location: Location data, address.

� Organization: Account assignment such as company code, cost center; orresponsibilities such as maintenance planning plant.

� Structure: For example, structure indicator, higher-level functionallocation, equipment.

Additional data or links in the master record for the functional location canalso be activated as tab pages or called up using pushbuttons (see graphic).



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 31: Automatic Assignment Upon Creation

The structure of the functional location is based on the structure indicator. Ifyou create a new functional location, such as C1-M01-2, the system checkswhether a hierarchy with this structure indicator already exists and whetherthe new identification is suitable for the existing hierarchy.

If this is the case, when the new functional location is created, it is included inthe existing structure.

Figure 32: Example of Functional Location Structure



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 4: Using Functional Locations

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Display the structure of functional locations� Explain the configuration of a structure indicator

Business ExampleThe Functional Location object of SAP is used by a company to map itscomplex technical systems such as welding, engine assembly, and vehicleassembly. The representation of the workshops and technical systems at IDESshould be based on a hierarchy of functional locations, which is defined usinga structure indicator.

Task 1Displaying the Structure of a Functional Location

1. Display the structure display of the clarification plant ##and determinethe functional location labels of the valves in the pump station of thebiological cleaning.

Task 2Displaying Functional Locations

1. Display the functional location ##-B02 and determine the following data:

Maintenance plant

Cost center

Cost center manager

Main work center

Task 3Structure of a Functional Location

1. Display the structure of functional location ##-B02 graphically. Howdo you proceed?




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Task 4Structure Indicator

1. Which structure indicator is used by clarification plant ##?

2. What are the effects of the structure indicator?

3. What is the edit screen and what does it mean?

4. What is the maximum number of levels that the hierarchy can have inthis example?



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 4: Using Functional LocationsTask 1Displaying the Structure of a Functional Location

1. Display the structure display of the clarification plant ##and determinethe functional location labels of the valves in the pump station of thebiological cleaning.

a) SAP menu→ Logistics→Plant Maintenance→Management of TechnicalObjects→ Functional Location ###Structural Display


Functional location ##

Levels below 1

Location hierarchy

Explode pump station for biological cleaning step-by-step:


Valves ##-B01-1A

##-B01-1B

##-B01-2A

##-B01-2B

Task 2Displaying Functional Locations

1. Display the functional location ##-B02 and determine the following data:

Maintenance plant

Cost center




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Cost center manager

Main work center

a) Double-click ##-B02 from the structural display or choose:

SAP menu→ Logistics→Plant Maintenance→Management of TechnicalObjects→ Functional Location ###Display


Maintenance plant 1000 (�Location� tab page)

Cost center 4110 (�Organization� tab page)

Cost center manager Linden (double-click costcenter)

Main work center MECHANIK (�Organization�tab page)

Task 3Structure of a Functional Location

1. Display the structure of functional location ##-B02 graphically. Howdo you proceed?

a) SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→ Management ofTechnical Objects→ Functional Location→ Structural Display.

Set "As graphic" indicator and Execute

Task 4Structure Indicator

1. Which structure indicator is used by clarification plant ##?

a) SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→ Management ofTechnical Objects→ Functional Location→ Display

�Structure� tab page, �StrIndicator� field




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


2. What are the effects of the structure indicator?

a) The structure indicator sets the default structure and labelingoptions for a functional location. This enables you to drawconclusions about the position of the functional location in thehierarchy from its label. In the same way, newly created functionallocations are automatically arranged in the correct position in anexisting hierarchy.

3. What is the edit screen and what does it mean?

a) From the display mode (1-4-2), go back using the green arrowsymbol (or the F3 function key) to the initial screen for DisplayFunctional Location. The edit mask and the number of hierarchylevels are now visible here:

Edit mask: XX-XXX-XX

XHierarchy level 1 2 3 4 5 6

If a character is represented by X, you can use either a numericalor an alphanumerical character.

Other options for representing characters are A (= alphanumerical)or N (= numerical).

The edit screen also specifies which separators are allowed.

4. What is the maximum number of levels that the hierarchy can have inthis example?

a) Maximum number of hierarchy levels in this example: 6



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Define functional locations� Create functional locations� Identify functional location using structure indicator



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Lesson: Equipment

Lesson: Equipment

Lesson OverviewIn this lesson, you will be able to describe the content and criteria forequipment. You will also state the purpose of the equipment master record.Finally, you will be able to identify the steps to install and dismantleequipment.


� Define equipment� Identify how to install and dismantle equipment� Explain the advantages of usage list

Business ExampleA company that has implemented the SAP Plant Maintenance componentneeds to get transactional data for individual business objects, such as weldingmachines and hydraulic press. The Plant Maintenance process enables usersto maintain an equipment master to track all the equipment.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Defining Equipment

Figure 33: Equipment

A piece of equipment is an individual physical object maintained as anautonomous unit. Pieces of equipment usually represent single objects such aspumps, motors, vehicles, for which maintenance tasks should be performedand recorded.

Equipment can be installed at functional locations. A piece of equipment canbe linked with a material, if there is inventory management, in the sense ofMaterials Management, for the object.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 34: Criteria for Equipment Master Record

You should always create an equipment master record for a technical object if:

� You need to manage individual data for the object.

� Breakdown, prepared or preventive maintenance tasks are required foran object and must be recorded.

� Technical data for this object must be collected and evaluated over longperiods of time.

� The costs of maintenance tasks for this object are to be monitored.

� You need to record the usage time of this object at functional locations.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 35: Equipment Master Record

The equipment master record uses the following views in the standard system:

� General: Class, object type, reference data, manufacturer data and so on.

� Location: Location data and address.

� Organization: Account assignment such as company code, or cost centerand responsibilities such as maintenance planning plant.

� Structure: For example, structure indicator, higher-level functionallocation, equipment.

Additional data or links in the master record for the equipment can also beactivated as tab pages or called up using pushbuttons (see figure).

You can use the time-based data to monitor a piece of equipment dynamically,that is, track changes to the equipment over a specific period of time. If yoursystem is customized accordingly, it automatically creates a new time segmentwhenever certain changes are made in the master record. The time segmentdescribes the equipment usage.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Installing and Dismantling Equipment

Figure 36: Installation/Dismantling of Equipment

Equipment can be installed and dismantled at the functional locations.You can monitor the installation times for a piece of equipment from bothfunctional location and equipment views.

In case a piece of equipment is linked with a material, when dismantled,the damaged piece of equipment can automatically be placed in storage.Likewise, when the spare part is withdrawn from storage, it can automaticallybe installed at the functional location.

Figure 37: Prerequisites for Equipment Installation



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Two prerequisites must be fulfilled for a piece of equipment to be installed ata functional location:

The equipment category must permit an installation (Customizing).

The option Equipment installation allowed must be activated in the masterrecord for the functional location. You can restrict this option by using theIndividual installation option.

Figure 38: Equipment Usage List

The installation locations for equipment within a technical system aredocumented in the usage list, which forms part of the equipment history.

Equipment usage periods can also be displayed from the functional locationview.

Apart from changes to the installation location, the usage list also documentsthe changes to other fields, such as cost center and asset, of the master record.When Customizing, you can set the fields that should be monitored in thisway.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 5: Creating Equipment

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Create an equipment master record� Install a piece of equipment

Business ExampleAn equipment master is maintained by a company in order to get transactionaldata for its individual business objects. It helps to identify equipment in abetter way. At IDES, individual physical aggregates, such as pumps andmotors, are represented as pieces of equipment.

Task 1Display the equipment master

1. Display the equipment with equipment number TEQ-##and determinethe following data:

Description

Maintenance plant

Cost center

Construction type

Maintenance planning plant

Main work center

Task 2Create equipment master

1. Create a new piece of equipment TEZ-##. You can freely select the data inthe area "General". The maintenance plant is 1000, cost center 4110. Howdo you proceed? What is the system status after you have created thepiece of equipment?




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Task 3Install equipment

1. Install the new piece of equipment in the pump station for biologicalcleaning in your clarification plant ##. How do you proceed?

Check the installation using the structural display for functionallocations. How do you proceed?

Task 4Usage List

1. Display the pump P-1000-N001. When and at which functional locationwas the equipment installed for the first time?

2. Which pieces of equipment were installed in the filter station forclarification plant C1 in the time between 01/01/1998 and 01/01/1999?

Use the structural display for this.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 5: Creating EquipmentTask 1Display the equipment master

1. Display the equipment with equipment number TEQ-##and determinethe following data:

Description

Maintenance plant

Cost center

Construction type


Main work center

a) SAP menu→ Logistics→Plant Maintenance→Management of TechnicalObjects→ Equipment→ Display


Description Electric pump ##

Maintenance plant 1000

Cost center 4110

Construction type P-1000

Maintenance planning plant 1000

Main work center T-ME##

Task 2Create equipment master




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


1. Create a new piece of equipment TEZ-##. You can freely select the data inthe area "General". The maintenance plant is 1000, cost center 4110. Howdo you proceed? What is the system status after you have created thepiece of equipment?

a) SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→ Management ofTechnical Objects→ Equipment→Create(General)

�General� tab page: Any data

�Location� tab page: Maintenance plant 1000

�Organization� tab page: Cost center 4110

System status after the entry: AVLB (= Available)

Task 3Install equipment

1. Install the new piece of equipment in the pump station for biologicalcleaning in your clarification plant ##. How do you proceed?

Check the installation using the structural display for functionallocations. How do you proceed?

a) SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→ Management ofTechnical Objects→ Equipment→ ChangeStructuring→ ChangeInstallation Location. In the "FunctLocation" field, enter label ##-B01and confirm, or

SAP menu→ Plant Maintenance→Management of Technical Objects→ Functional Location→ Structural Display

Enter label ##;confirm; open structure for biological cleaning;double-click location ##-B01; Functional Location * Display *Change; �Structure� tab page; in the area "Equipment", symbol for"Sub-equipment"; enter TEZ-## in the list and save. System statusafter the installation: INST (=Installed)

Subsequently:

SAP menu→ Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Management of TechnicalObjects→ Functional Location→ Structural Display

Enter location ##-B01 and activate the indicator �Equipmentinstalled�




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Task 4Usage List

1. Display the pump P-1000-N001. When and at which functional locationwas the equipment installed for the first time?

a) SAP menu→ Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→ Technical Objects→Equipment→ Display

Extras→ Usage list


Installation date (Valid fromcolumn)

05.12.1994

Funct. Location K1-B01-1

2. Which pieces of equipment were installed in the filter station forclarification plant C1 in the time between 01/01/1998 and 01/01/1999?

Use the structural display for this.

a) SAP menu→ Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Management of TechnicalObjects→ Functional Location→ Structural Display

Detailed view by double clicking or magnifying glass on K1-B02:

Structure→ Usage Periods

Enter period; installed equipment: P-1000-N001, M-1000-N051



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Define equipment� Identify how to install and dismantle equipment� Explain the advantages of usage list



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Lesson: Bills of Material

Lesson: Bills of Material

Lesson OverviewIn this lesson, you will identify the application of Bills of Material (BOM) inPlant Maintenance. You will also be able to state the functions and purposeof BOM.


� Identify the application of Bills of Material in Plant Maintenance

Business ExampleIn a company, equipment Bills of Material (BOM) comprises of parts such as,hydraulic press, hydraulic pump, valves, and coolers. You can use this BOMto carry out spare parts planning in the task list in the company and also tocalculate the planned cost of the maintenance task.

Defining Bills of Material

Figure 39: Bills of Material in a Company



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


BOM is used for different purpose. The usage depends on the Enterprisearea, for example:

The engineering/design BOM includes all the elements of the product (froman engineering viewpoint) and contains the technical data. It is usually notdependent on the order.

The production BOM includes the items, from a production viewpoint, andassembly conditions. For the assembly, for example, only items relevant toproduction with process-oriented data are required.

The costing BOM reproduces the product structure and forms the basis forautomatic determination of the material usage costs for a product. Items thatare not relevant for costing are not included in this bill of material.

Instead of a uniform bill of material, these areas use �their own� bill ofmaterial with area-specific data, such as production. They only evaluatebills of material containing area-specific data. This results in a targeted billof material explosion, whereby only the area-specific data is made available.Data selection is controlled using the definition of the bill of material usage. Adetermination sequence by bill of material usage is defined while Customizingfor selecting the correct bill of material for an application.

Bills of Material in Plant Maintenance

Figure 40: Bills of Material in Plant Maintenance



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


The maintenance bill of material differs from other BOMs in that it onlycontains items relevant to Plant Maintenance. Additionally, the bill of materialhas three important functions:

Structuring of the object -

The structure of an object should be displayed as clearly as possible from amaintenance viewpoint.

Spare parts planning in the order -

If a technical object uses a bill of material, you can use this simply during theplanning or a maintenance order to plan spare parts.

Spare parts planning in the task list -

Spare parts can be planned in the task list based on a bill of material. Thereare three categories of maintenance bill of material:

� Material BOM� Equipment BOM� Functional location BOM

Figure 41: Bills of Material: Example of Material BOM



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Material BOMs are used in Plant Maintenance if a number of similarlyconstructed objects have to be maintained. The aim is not to create a BOMfor each technical object, but to create just one BOM and assign this to all thetechnical objects. This avoids redundant BOM.

A material BOM is a bill of material that is first created for a materialindependent of a technical object. To do this, you must:

� Create a material

� Create a material BOM for the material

The bill of material can then be assigned to one or more technical objects,such as equipment or functional location. You can assign the respectivetechnical object master record using the Structure view. The number of thecorresponding material is entered in the Construction type field. Refer tothe graphic above.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 6: Using Bills of Material

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Explain the purpose of BOM in Plant Maintenance� Display the BOM for a piece of equipment� Assign a material BOM to a piece of equipment

Business ExampleThe Bills of Material (BOM) can be used by a company to carry out spareparts planning in the task list and also to estimate the planned cost of themaintenance task. At IDES, all the individual parts for functional locationsand pieces of equipment, for which no history is required but where spareparts planning is important, should be represented using bills of material.

Task 1The structure of your equipment TEZ-## should be represented for PlantMaintenance using a material BOM.

Since TEZ-##and TEQ-## are constructed in the same way, you can use thesame material BOM P-1000.

1. Assign the material BOM P-1000 to your piece of equipment.

How do you proceed?

Task 2Material Number

1. What is the material number of the pressure cover for the pump and howcan this be determined from the master record for the equipment?



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 6: Using Bills of MaterialTask 1The structure of your equipment TEZ-## should be represented for PlantMaintenance using a material BOM.

Since TEZ-## and TEQ-## are constructed in the same way, you can use thesame material BOM P-1000.

1. Assign the material BOM P-1000 to your piece of equipment.

How do you proceed?

a) SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→ Management ofTechnical Objects→ Equipment ###Change

�Structure� tab page

�Construction type� field: Enter material P-1000

Save equipment

Task 2Material Number

1. What is the material number of the pressure cover for the pump and howcan this be determined from the master record for the equipment?

a) SAP menu→ Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Management of TechnicalObjects→ Equipment ###Change

�Structure list� button

or

Structure→ Structure list

Material number for pressure cover: 401-400



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Identify the application of Bills of Material in Plant Maintenance



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit Summary PLM300

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Define functional locations� Create functional locations� Identify functional location using structure indicator� Define equipment� Identify how to install and dismantle equipment� Explain the advantages of usage list� Identify the application of Bills of Material in Plant Maintenance



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Test Your Knowledge

1. A functional location is spatial when its structure is based onprocess-oriented criteria.Determine whether this statement is true or false.

TrueFalse

2. You should create functional locations to structure your systems if:Choose the correct answer(s).

A Maintenance tasks have to be performed.B Technical data has to be stored and evaluated over a long

period of time.C Revenues have to be monitored.D Effects of the usage conditions on the installed equipment have

to be analyzed.

3. State the maximum number of characters that can be used to identify afunctional location.

4. Equipment is defined as a collection of physical objects that aremaintained as individual autonomous units.Determine whether this statement is true or false.

TrueFalse

5. State the functions of usage lists.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


6. State the prerequisites for installing equipment.

7. How does a maintenance BOM differ from other BOMs in the company?



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Answers

1. A functional location is spatial when its structure is based onprocess-oriented criteria.

Answer: False

A functional location is functional when its structure is based onprocess-oriented criteria, such as polymerization or condensation.

2. You should create functional locations to structure your systems if:

Answer: A, B, D

You should create functional locations to structure your systems if costsof maintenance tasks have to be monitored.

3. State the maximum number of characters that can be used to identify afunctional location.

Answer: Amaximum of 40 characters can be used to identify a functionallocation.

4. Equipment is defined as a collection of physical objects that aremaintained as individual autonomous units.

Answer: False

Equipment is defined as an individual physical object that should bemaintained as an autonomous unit.

5. State the functions of usage lists.

Answer: In addition to changes to the installation locations, usage listsalso document changes to other fields of the master record, such as costcenter and asset.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


6. State the prerequisites for installing equipment.

Answer: Two prerequisites must be fulfilled for a piece of equipment tobe installed at a functional location are the equipment category mustpermit an installation (Customizing) and the option Equipment installationallowedmust be activated in the master record for the functional location.

7. How does a maintenance BOM differ from other BOMs in the company?

Answer: The maintenance bill of material differs from other BOMs inthat it only contains items relevant to Plant Maintenance.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 4Breakdown Maintenance

Unit OverviewAfter completing this unit, you will be able to create a BreakdownMaintenance order for a malfunction or damage. You will also learn abouttime confirmations and technical completion of Breakdown Maintenanceorders and notifications.


� Explain the Breakdown Maintenance Process� Create the Breakdown Maintenance Orders� Process the Breakdown Maintenance Orders� Identify time confirmations in the Breakdown Maintenance Process� Explain technical completion of a Maintenance order

Unit ContentsLesson: Processing Breakdown Maintenance Orders .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102

Exercise 7: Creating Breakdown Maintenance Orders .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109Lesson: Confirming and Completing Orders .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117


I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 4: Breakdown Maintenance PLM300

Lesson: Processing Breakdown Maintenance Orders

Lesson OverviewIn this lesson, you will get an overview of the Breakdown MaintenanceProcess and view the possible flow of the process. You will also identifythe instruments for processing maintenance tasks and learn about themaintenance order.


� Explain the Breakdown Maintenance Process� Create the Breakdown Maintenance Orders� Process the Breakdown Maintenance Orders

Business ExampleThe Processing Breakdown Maintenance Orders component of SAP recordsthe downtime, technical details, and the costs incurred on a particularbreakdown in a company.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Lesson: Processing Breakdown Maintenance Orders

Breakdown Maintenance Orders

Figure 42: Breakdown Maintenance: Process

For effective breakdown maintenance, you need to enter the data required forother business processes quickly and easily to execute the subsequent steps.

The five-step cycle of corrective maintenance processing is reduced to athree-step cycle for breakdown maintenance:

Step 1: The starting point is the creation of a maintenance order, possibly usingdata from the maintenance notification, for damage or a malfunction. Thismaintenance order is not planned, but is immediately released for processing.Any order papers required are also printed.

Step 2: The execution phase comprises the removal of spare parts from stockand the actual execution of the order.

Step 3: In the completion phase, the actual time required is confirmed.Technical confirmations are also entered to record the repair and condition ofthe technical system. The order is settled in the Controlling phase.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 43: Possible Process Flow for Breakdown Maintenance

Breakdown maintenance involves the creation and release of the maintenanceorder in one work step after an employee reports a malfunction.

Depending on the organization, this step is performed by the maintenancesupervisor or the central maintenance planner.

The malfunction is corrected by a maintenance work center named in theorder. After the malfunction has been corrected, the order is confirmed by theperson performing the task, the maintenance supervisor and the maintenanceplanner. Either the supervisor or the maintenance planner then completesthe order.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 44: Order: With or Without Notification

The breakdown order can be created directly without any previous requisitionnote, see figure (A). The order usually refers to a technical object (functionallocation or equipment) and is configured at a work center. In the firstoperation, the malfunction to be corrected is described broadly.

You can also create a breakdown order in combination with a maintenancenotification (B), if malfunction data should be stored at this time for laterdocumentation, such as malfunction start or damage. As a result, the ordercontains the same data as in case A, and the notification contains all the datarelevant for the documentation or history.

Although, the breakdown order and notification data is entered on the samescreen, you can supplement and complete the notification later.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 45: Maintenance Processing Instruments

Two instruments are available for processing maintenance tasks:

Orders are used to plan maintenance tasks and plan or track the costsincurred. The planning functions do not necessarily have to be executed here.Orders can also be created as immediate orders without any planning.

Notifications are used to convey the maintenance requirements and thedocumentation for the technical findings and activities performed.

Although orders and notifications can be used independent of each other, theyare usually combined to utilize the advantages of both the instruments.

Special case: Entering an order and notification in one work step

During the processing of breakdown maintenance, the malfunction order canbe created together with a malfunction report. As a result, the notificationareas, malfunction data, damage, and notification dates are shown on theorder header. The advantage here is that you can enter important malfunctiondata for the subsequent documentation when creating the order.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 46: Maintenance Order: Put in Process

The function Put in Process releases the order, prints the required order papers,and finally saves the order.

You can perform the following activities after releasing the order:

� Withdraw material� Post goods receipts� Enter time confirmations



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 7: Creating BreakdownMaintenance Orders

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Create a breakdown maintenance order and put it in process

Business ExampleThe downtime and technical details of a breakdown and also the costsincurred on a particular breakdown in a company are recorded in BreakdownMaintenance Order. It contains only the most important data to ensure aquick response.

Task 1Creating a maintenance order without a maintenance notification

Set up a maintenance order for your equipment TEQ-## as a breakdownmaintenance task and enter the priority�Very high��.

1. Which order type do you choose?

2. Which start and end dates are displayed based on the priority?

Start date:

End date:

3. Which other data is proposed? Where does this data come from?

4. Which system status does the order have at this point?

5. Put the order in process without printing it.

Which order number is assigned?

How has the system status changed?




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Task 2Creating an Order with a Notification. For a breakdown maintenance task,you set up a maintenance order combined with a notification, since you wantto keep malfunction data determined now to document it later. Configure themaintenance order for your piece of equipment TEQ-## and assign priority�Very high�.


2. Enter a malfunction start (date, time) and select the switch field for abreakdown.

Enter a suitable damage code. How do you proceed?

Put the order in process without printing it.

Which order number was assigned?

Task 3Confirming a breakdown order

1. Enter an individual confirmation for both your maintenance orderscreated above.


Set the final confirmation indicator.

Task 4Technical confirmation

1. Complete the maintenance notification which you have created togetherwith your second order.

Enter a malfunction end a suitable cause of damage.

How do you proceed?

Task 5Completing a breakdown order

1. Which status does the order have before the technical completion?

2. Technically complete your maintenance orders. How do you proceed?

3. Complete the notification as well. Which indicator do you set?

4. Which status does the order have after the technical completion?



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 7: Creating BreakdownMaintenance OrdersTask 1Creating a maintenance order without a maintenance notification

Set up a maintenance order for your equipment TEQ-## as a breakdownmaintenance task and enter the priority�Very high��.


a) SAP menu→ Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Maintenance Processing→ Order ###Create (General)


Order type PM01

2. Which start and end dates are displayed based on the priority?

Start date:

End date:

a)


Start date Current date

End date Current date + 1

3. Which other data is proposed? Where does this data come from?

a) Default data:


From the equipment master Maintenance planner group

Main work center

Functional loc.

From Customizing Maintenance activity type




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


4. Which system status does the order have at this point?

a) System Status


CRTD Created

MANC Material availability not checked

NTUP Dates are not updated

5. Put the order in process without printing it.


How has the system status changed?

a) Choose button �Put in process� (white paper with cogwheels)

Order number: xxxxxx (assigned by the system)

Order→ Change

System Status


REL Released

SETC Settlement rule created

NMAT No material components

PRC Pre-costed

Task 2Creating an Order with a Notification. For a breakdown maintenance task,you set up a maintenance order combined with a notification, since you wantto keep malfunction data determined now to document it later. Configure themaintenance order for your piece of equipment TEQ-## and assign priority�Very high�.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y



a) SAP menu→ Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Maintenance Processing→ Order ###Create (General)


Order type PM05

2. Enter a malfunction start (date, time) and select the switch field for abreakdown.

Enter a suitable damage code. How do you proceed?


Which order number was assigned?

a) On the �Malfnctn Data� tab page (belongs to the notification and isdisplayed on the order header), enter a breakdown start and set the�Breakdown� indicator.

Then enter a suitable type of damage on the �Damage� tab page: Todo this, position the cursor in the �Damage� field and use F4-Help,for example, to select a damage from the code group PUMP/100.

Then press button �Put in process� (white paper with cogwheels).

Task 3Confirming a breakdown order

1. Enter an individual confirmation for both your maintenance orderscreated above.


Set the final confirmation indicator.

a) Confirming a Breakdown OrderSAP menu→ Logistics→ PlantMaintenance→Maintenance Processing→ Completion Confirmation→Entry→ Individual Time Confirmation


Actual work For example, 5 hours

Final confirmation




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Task 4Technical confirmation

1. Complete the maintenance notification which you have created togetherwith your second order.

Enter a malfunction end a suitable cause of damage.

How do you proceed?

a) SAP menu→ Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Maintenance Processing→ Order→ Change

Choose symbol for notification

Enter the malfunction end in the area for malfunction data.

In the item area, select the damage code.

To do this, position the cursor in the Cause Code field and useF4-Help, for example, to select a cause from the code group PM01.

Task 5Completing a breakdown order

1. Which status does the order have before the technical completion?


System Status


REL Released

CNF Confirmed



PRC Pre-costed

Note: You can use the i-button at the end of the status line todisplay information about the abbreviations for the systemstatuses




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


2. Technically complete your maintenance orders. How do you proceed?



Technically complete the order Function "Complete(technically)"

3. Complete the notification as well. Which indicator do you set?

a)


Completing the notification Indicator "Completenotifications"

4. Which status does the order have after the technical completion?

a) System Status


REL Released

CNF Confirmed



PRC Pre-costed



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Explain the Breakdown Maintenance Process� Create the Breakdown Maintenance Orders� Process the Breakdown Maintenance Orders



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Lesson: Confirming and Completing Orders

Lesson: Confirming and Completing Orders

Lesson OverviewIn this lesson, you will learn about the scope of time confirmations in theBreakdown Maintenance process. You will also be able to identify the statusof a Maintenance order.


� Identify time confirmations in the Breakdown Maintenance Process� Explain technical completion of a Maintenance order

Business ExampleA company that has implemented SAP components wants to record the timeused to accomplish a maintenance task and perform material confirmation.The SAP Breakdown Maintenance component enables users to recordbreakdown orders, complete confirmation, and technically complete orders.

Time Confirmations

Figure 47: Time Confirmations



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


In most cases, breakdown maintenance involves one order with only oneoperation. For this reason, you can use the individual entry function for timeconfirmation. Here, you can enter the actual time directly on the detail screenfor the operation confirmation.

When confirmations of operations have been entered for a Maintenanceorder, these operations are automatically assigned the status PCNF (Partiallyconfirmed) by the system.

As soon as all the operations for a Maintenance order have been completelyconfirmed, the order itself is assigned the status CNF (Confirmed).

There is always a risk of completion confirmations being assigned to thewrong operations or entered with the wrong data. The system thereforeallows you to reverse completion confirmations if required.

Instead of using individual entry, you can use the overall completionconfirmation function to enter not only the times, but also, for example,material withdrawals, counter readings and so on, on a single screen.

Technical Completion

Figure 48: Maintenance Order: Technical Completion

The Maintenance order obtains the status TECO (Technically completed).In other words, the maintenance work required for this order has beencompleted.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Lesson: Confirming and Completing Orders

The Maintenance order can now only be changed online as follows:

� It can be locked or unlocked.

� The deletion flag can be set.

The location and account assignment data specified for the maintenance orderis fixed and can no longer be changed. However, the order can still receivecosts, for example, invoice receipts for materials delivered and consumed.

If you have not maintained a settlement rule for the Maintenance order, it iscreated automatically by the system. If this is not possible owing to missingdata, the system directs you to where the settlement rule can be maintained.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Identify time confirmations in the Breakdown Maintenance Process� Explain technical completion of a Maintenance order



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Unit Summary

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Explain the Breakdown Maintenance Process� Create the Breakdown Maintenance Orders� Process the Breakdown Maintenance Orders� Identify time confirmations in the Breakdown Maintenance Process� Explain technical completion of a Maintenance order



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit Summary PLM300



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Test Your Knowledge

1. A breakdown order can also be created with amaintenance notification maintenance notification.Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence.

2. The first step in the Breakdown Maintenance Process is the creation ofmaintenance order maintenance order.Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence.

3. The function Put in Process releases the order and prints the requiredorder papers.Determine whether this statement is true or false.

TrueFalse

4. Time, material and counter reading can be confirmed in a single entryusing overall completion overall completionfunction.Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence.

5. The location and account assignment data specified for the Maintenanceorder is fixed.Determine whether this statement is true or false.

TrueFalse



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Answers

1. A breakdown order can also be created with a maintenance notification.

Answer: maintenance notification

2. The first step in the Breakdown Maintenance Process is the creation ofmaintenance order.

Answer: maintenance order

3. The function Put in Process releases the order and prints the requiredorder papers.

Answer: False

The function Put in Process releases the order, prints the required orderpapers, and finally saves the order.

4. Time, material and counter reading can be confirmed in a single entryusing overall completionfunction.

Answer: overall completion

5. The location and account assignment data specified for the Maintenanceorder is fixed.

Answer: True

The location and account assignment data specified for the Maintenanceorder is fixed.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 5Corrective Maintenance

Unit OverviewIn this unit, you will be able to report, view, and process requirements forcorrective maintenance. You will also be able to plan orders with operations,stock and non-stock material, utilities, and costs and release and print orders.In addition, you will be able to make planned and unplanned withdrawalsof material and record time and technical confirmations and ensure theirtechnical completion. Finally, you will get an overview of online and offlinemobile solutions.


� Identify the various phases of the Corrective Maintenance process� Create maintenance notifications� Identify the structure of a maintenance notification� Identify the various objects in maintenance notification� Select maintenance notification� Identify the planning phase of the Corrective Maintenance process� Create a maintenance order� Explain material purchase through a maintenance order� Identify the scheduling phase of the Corrective Maintenance cycle� Select the appropriate maintenance orders� Release and print the maintenance orders� Identify the execution phase of Corrective Maintenance process� Describe material withdrawals and identify its types� Identify the activities involved in completing themaintenance order� Identify the activities involved in completing the maintenance order

notification


I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 5: Corrective Maintenance PLM300

� Process external services for maintenance orders� Process individual purchases for maintenance orders� Identify receipt of goods and verify invoices� Identify the processing of maintenance orders at external work centers� Describe the service procurement process� Identify online mobile solutions� Identify offline mobile solutions

Unit ContentsLesson: Corrective Maintenance Process ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127Lesson: Notification of Maintenance Requirements... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

Exercise 8: Notifications ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139Lesson: Planning of Orders ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146

Exercise 9: Order Planning... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159Lesson: Scheduling Maintenance Tasks... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175

Exercise 10: Scheduling of Maintenance Tasks ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185Lesson: Executing Maintenance Tasks .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195

Exercise 11: Execution of Maintenance Tasks .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199Lesson: Completing Notifications and Orders .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205

Exercise 12: Completion of Maintenance Notification .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215Lesson: Purchasing External Services .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229

Exercise 13: Procurement of External Services... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247Exercise 14: External services as service items ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253

Lesson: Explaining Mobile Solutions .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Lesson: Corrective Maintenance Process

Lesson: Corrective Maintenance Process

Lesson OverviewIn this lesson, you will identify the various phases of the CorrectiveMaintenance process. These phases include Notification, Planning,Scheduling, Execution, and Completion.


� Identify the various phases of the Corrective Maintenance process

Business ExampleA company that has implemented SAP component wants to collect itsmaintenance requirements and then deal with them during order processing.The Corrective Maintenance process of SAP enables users to detailrequirements such as malfunctions.

Different Phases of Corrective Maintenance Process

Figure 49: Corrective Maintenance: Process



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


At International Demonstration and Education System, the maintenancerequirements are collected and then dealt with during order processing. Thisprocessing involves the following steps: notification, planning, scheduling,execution, and completion.

Step 1: Notification: Malfunctions and other requirements are detailed in thenotification and entered in the system. You can use the notification list tofind and process notifications.

Step 2: Planning: In this step, orders are created for the requirements outlinedin the notification. The order contains the tasks to be performed, togetherwith the materials and tools required.

Step 3: Scheduling: In the control step, the order undergoes checks, such asmaterial availability check, capacity requirement check, which are importantfor the subsequent release. If no serious problems arise, for example, sparepart not available for required date, then the order is put into process and -usually in the same step - the shop papers are printed.

Step 4: Execution: In this step, the task is performed on site. The requiredmaterials are withdrawn from storage with reference to the order. Unplannedwithdrawals of material, that is, withdrawals that have not been reservedthrough the order, are also possible.

Step 5: Completion: This phase is composed of the partial steps of timeconfirmation, entering the actual times worked, technical completion,completing the results, and technical completion. The Controlling departmentcan settle the order at the same time.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Lesson: Corrective Maintenance Process

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Identify the various phases of the Corrective Maintenance process



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson: Notification of Maintenance Requirements

Lesson OverviewIn this lesson, you will be able to create maintenance notifications andidentify their structure. You will also be able to identify the various objectsin maintenance notifications.

Finally, you will be able to select appropriate maintenance notifications.


� Create maintenance notifications� Identify the structure of a maintenance notification� Identify the various objects in maintenance notification� Select maintenance notification

Business ExampleA company needs to determine the origin, content, and other features ofmaintenance, thereby making them available for evaluation in the long run.It can track the downtime of using notifications by creating maintenancenotifications.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Lesson: Notification of Maintenance Requirements

Creating Notifications

Figure 50: Cycle for Corrective Maintenance

The starting point for corrective maintenance, step 1, is the notificationof a damage, a malfunction, or some other request, such as a request formodification work.

The notification usually refers to a technical object and contains a descriptionof the malfunction or requirements. In addition, data can be entered in anotification to build up the history, for example, damage, causes and so on.

A maintenance task, which is very frequently processed using a maintenanceorder, is introduced owing to the request or malfunction.

A notification does not necessitate the creation of an order in every case.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Notification Structure

Figure 51: Maintenance Notification: Structure

Each maintenance notification contains header data. Header data is theinformation used to identify and manage the maintenance notification. Thisdata is valid for the complete maintenance notification.

You enter and maintain data in a notification item to determine a problem,damage, or the activity executed in greater detail. A notification can containseveral items.

Activities document the work performed for a notification. They areparticularly important for inspections because they prove that certain taskshave been performed.

The task data describes activities that should still be performed, and whichmight have only arisen after the maintenance task was executed, such ascreating a report. However, in some cases, you can also use tasks for planningpurposes, for example, if order processing is not active. In this case, youcan plan to use different people to process the notification and monitor theexecution of activities for specific periods of time. Note, however, that no costmonitoring, material planning, or capacity requirements planning is possiblefor this type of processing.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Notification Objects

Figure 52: Objects in Maintenance Notification

All the types of maintenance notification mentioned can be entered for botha functional location and a piece of equipment, in each case with or withoutassembly, or for a material with serial number. The hierarchy for theseobjects corresponds to the sequence specified. In other words, if you enter amaintenance notification for an assembly on a piece of equipment, which isassigned to a functional location, the system transfers all the relevant data forthe piece of equipment and the functional location.

However, you can also enter these maintenance notifications withoutspecifying an object number. This is the case, for example, if a malfunctionreport refers to an object that is not managed in the system under a number,or if a maintenance request refers to a new object to be provided for aninvestment program.

A view for the reference object can be chosen for an individual notificationor for a notification type as follows:

Functional location + Equipment + Assembly, standard setting.

Functional location + Equipment + Assembly, for functional locations withexactly one piece of equipment installed, the equipment is set automatically.

Functional location.

Equipment, with or without assembly.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Material number + Serial number, with or without equipment number.

Without a reference object.

Figure 53: Maintenance Notification: Object Information

You can use the object information to obtain a swift overview of the conditionand history of the object concerned.

The dialog box contains data, where available, about the classification of theobject. It displays statistics for the maintenance notifications related to theobject and the last three maintenance notifications entered for this object withshort text, date, and completion. You can also call up information aboutorders, maintenance items, and maintenance dates.

The dialog box can be displayed automatically if required, provided thatcertain conditions are fulfilled. For example, you can make settings inCustomizing so that the object information is always displayed if notificationsfor the object are outstanding in a certain period of time. In this way, you, asthe person who entered the notification, automatically receive any importantinformation at this point.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 54: Catalogs

Catalogs are used when maintaining notifications for the coded entry ofresults and activities. Coded entry is particularly useful for analysis. Thereare certain standard analyses in the Plant Maintenance Information System(PMIS), which can be used to analyze these codes.

� Catalog: Combination of code groups, grouped together according tocontent, such as damage, cause of damage.

� Code groups: Combination of code groups, grouped together accordingto content, such as damage to vehicles, pumps, motors or mechanicaldamage, electrical damage and so on.

� Codes: Description of damage, an activity and so on.

Advantages of Catalogs:

� No incorrect entries.� Codes can be used as the starting point for workflows and follow-up

actions.� Statistical evaluations are possible using the standard analyses in the

PMIS.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 55: Catalogs and Catalog Profiles

In the catalog profile, you can define which code groups can be used whenprocessing a specific object. The advantage here is that only the code groupsrelevant for the object are displayed.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Selecting Notifications

Figure 56: Selecting Maintenance Notifications

There are many reasons why the list editing features of the system can supportyou when selecting maintenance notifications, tasks, and items. For example,if you want to:

� Change or display a specific maintenance notification, but do not knowits number.

� Change or display several maintenance notifications, which have certainfeatures.

� Execute a specific function simultaneously for several maintenancenotifications, which have certain features, such as printing, or creatingan order.

� Obtain an overview of all the notification tasks that meet specific criteria.� Have a list of all the notification items that meet specific criteria.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 57: Selection Hitlist: ABAP List Viewer

The ABAP List Viewer, which allows you to flexibly represent and processlists, is available for displaying the results of a selection. For example, there isan option to:

- Move columns using Drag & Drop.

- Make columns wider or narrower.

- Select.

- Sort.

The list can also be sorted by several columns simultaneously, for example, bynotification date and notification number.

You can also change lists using a customer exit, for example, to add headingsor change print parameters.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 8: Notifications

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Describe the structure of a maintenance notification� Create notifications of different notification types� Select and further process maintenance notifications

Business ExampleA company needs to create maintenance notifications to determine the origin,content, and other features of maintenance and also to make them availablefor evaluation in the long run. These notifications are collected in the form ofrequests or malfunction reports and converted into orders by a maintenanceplanner.

Task 1Creating a Maintenance Request

1. Create a maintenance request for equipment P-1000-N001; a new weldedjoint is to be made on the casing of the pump motor.

Enter a damage description and a long text and assign the maintenancerequest to your maintenance planner group I## and your work centerT-ME##.

Which notification number is assigned?

2. Assign an assembly

Select an appropriate maintenance assembly. How do you proceed?Which data have you entered?

3. Object information

Obtain information about the equipment from the object informationscreen.

What is the practical use of the object information?

What information is offered?




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Task 2Creating a Malfunction Report

1. Create a malfunction report for your pump TEQ-##: the electric supplycables are broken and must be renewed.

Enter a malfunction start in the malfunction report and set the breakdownindicator.


2. Damage code and cause code

Specify an appropriate damage in your malfunction report and, if alreadyknown, a cause of damage. Which data have you entered?

Damage/code group:

Cause/code group:

Task 3Selecting Maintenance Notifications

1. Select all the maintenance notifications created in this course (in displaymode).

Which selection criteria do you choose?

2. Display the list so that you can see who created the maintenancenotifications and when; then sort the list alphabetically by the name ofthe person who entered the notification. How do you proceed?

3. You want to save the relevant settings in the list for future list displays.

How do you save the current settings as a layout?

How can this variant be set as the standard layout?



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 8: NotificationsTask 1Creating a Maintenance Request

1. Create a maintenance request for equipment P-1000-N001; a new weldedjoint is to be made on the casing of the pump motor.

Enter a damage description and a long text and assign the maintenancerequest to your maintenance planner group I## and your work centerT-ME##.


a) Creating a Maintenance Request

SAP menu→ Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→ MaintenanceProcessing→ Notification→ Create (Special)→ MaintenanceRequest


Short text Provide new weld joint

Long text (button Create text) Enter text as required

Reference object (equipment) P-1000-N001

2. Assign an assembly

Select an appropriate maintenance assembly. How do you proceed?Which data have you entered?

a) Assign an assembly

The assembly is part of the object structure (object BOM) and is usedto precise the damage location.

�Structure list� symbol in the reference object screen area.

>>The equipment BOM is exploded

>>For example, select material 100-100 (casing)

3. Object information




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Obtain information about the equipment from the object informationscreen.

What is the practical use of the object information?

What information is offered?

a) Object information

Press the I-button (blue-white) in the reference object screen area.

The object information gives an overview of the overall situation ofthe reference object. This makes it possible to coordinate differentareas � for example, breakdown processing and maintenance orders:the object information shows you whether a maintenance orderexists in the near future which could potentially be extended torepair the malfunction. This saves having to create a separatebreakdown order.

The information displayed includes:

- Data on the reference object

- Documents (for example, technical drawings)

- Maintenance dates

- Various key figures

- The last three notifications for the reference object

- The last order for the reference object

Task 2Creating a Malfunction Report

1. Create a malfunction report for your pump TEQ-##: the electric supplycables are broken and must be renewed.

Enter a malfunction start in the malfunction report and set the breakdownindicator.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y



a) Creating a Malfunction Report

SAP menu→ Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→ MaintenanceProcessing→ Notification→ Create (Special)→ MalfunctionReport

Notification number: 10000xxx

2. Damage code and cause code

Specify an appropriate damage in your malfunction report and, if alreadyknown, a cause of damage. Which data have you entered?

Damage/code group:

Cause/code group:

a) Damage code and cause code


Damage/code group For example, PUMP/100 1001

Cause of damage/code group For example, PM02 1000

Task 3Selecting Maintenance Notifications

1. Select all the maintenance notifications created in this course (in displaymode).

Which selection criteria do you choose?

a) SAP menu→ Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→ MaintenanceProcessing→ Notification→ List Editing→ Display

Selection criteria:

For example, notification date from "start date of course" until"finish date of course" and reported by "PLM300*"




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


2. Display the list so that you can see who created the maintenancenotifications and when; then sort the list alphabetically by the name ofthe person who entered the notification. How do you proceed?

a) Display and sort list:

Settings→ Display variant→ Current:

Select "Created at" and "Created by"

Button "3" and "Copy"

Select column "Created by" and symbol "Sort ascending"

3. You want to save the relevant settings in the list for future list displays.

How do you save the current settings as a layout?

How can this variant be set as the standard layout?

a) Settings→ Layouts→ Save as variant

Enter variant name and variant description, then save >> Auser-specific variant is created

Settings→ Layouts→ Administration

clickDefault Setting field >> A green tick appears,save



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Create maintenance notifications� Identify the structure of a maintenance notification� Identify the various objects in maintenance notification� Select maintenance notification



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson: Planning of Orders

Lesson OverviewIn this lesson, you will identify the planning phase of the CorrectiveMaintenance Process. You will also be able to create maintenance orders.Finally, you will be able to explain material purchase through maintain orders.


� Identify the planning phase of the Corrective Maintenance process� Create a maintenance order� Explain material purchase through a maintenance order

Business ExampleOrder planning can facilitate a company to plan its resources and operations.It can also help the company to plan the allocation of spare parts for themaintenance tasks to be performed. The SAP Corrective Maintenance processenables users to plan orders.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Lesson: Planning of Orders

Planning Maintenance Orders


In the planning step, the order is created and planned from the notification.Typical planning tasks include creating operations, reserving spare parts, orplanning usage times.

Figure 59: Planning Alternatives: Internal or External Processing?



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


In corrective maintenance, there are basically two options for assigning workto be performed:

For internal processing, internal workshops, which are defined in the systemas maintenance work centers, execute the work.

For external processing, external companies are hired. There are three waysof representing this external service.

Creating Maintenance Orders

Figure 60: Creation of Maintenance Orders

1. Case: The maintenance order is created directly, such as breakdown order.

2. Case: The maintenance notification is not entered centrally, but is createdfor the maintenance notification by the person responsible.

3. Case: In a maintenance order, several maintenance notifications arecombined into one or more objects.

4. Case: An activity report for an existing maintenance order is enteredsubsequently as a technical confirmation.

5. Case: A maintenance order is automatically generated from a maintenanceitem by the maintenance plan.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 61: Elements of Maintenance Order

The header data is the information that serves to identify and manage themaintenance order. It is valid for the whole maintenance order - for example,the number, description and type of order, scheduled dates for order execution,priority of tasks, creator, last person who changed the order, and so on.

The object list contains the objects to be processed, functional locations,equipment, assemblies, serial numbers, and is implemented if the sameactivity must be performed at multiple objects of the same type.

The order operation describes the tasks that should be performed for themaintenance order and who performs them with what guidelines.

Thematerial list, that is, the component list, contains spare parts, which arerequired and used when the maintenance order is executed.

Production resources/tools, such as tools, protective clothing, and trucks, arerequired to execute the maintenance order, but are not used up.

The data in the settlement rule provides information on who should bear thecosts. It is proposed from the master record for the reference object and can bechanged when the first settlement rule is maintained for the order.

The costs view tells you how much the estimated, planned, and actual costsare in the value categories for this order. There is a technical view and acontrolling view available.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 62: Operations

When you prepare work using operations, you can plan at three differentdetail levels, depending on the type of maintenance order and the scope ofthe work planned.

For minor orders with only one operation, fast entry, you can enter the datafor an operation in the header data screen in the bottom section of the screenwithout changing the screen. This operation can be either an internal orexternal process.

Comprehensive orders without detailed planning: You use the operationoverview for these orders. Here, you can enter any number of operationsin list form.

Short or comprehensive orders with detailed planning: You use the operationoverview and the operation detail screens for these orders. For detailedinformation about internal processing, use the Operation Internal Processingscreen. For detailed information about external processing, use the OperationExternal Processing screen.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 63: Maintenance Order: Object List

The object list is an integral part of the maintenance order. This is used tocompile multiple notifications and also to assign several technical objectsto the order.

Even if no reference object has been specified for the maintenance order onthe header data screen, you can assign technical objects and/or maintenancenotifications to the maintenance order in the object list.

If notifications are assigned to the order using the object list, the firstnotification in the order header appears in the "Notification" field. The firstnotification is indicated as the header notification.

Both the header notification and the other notifications in the object list canbe separated from the order again.

The object list does not �control� the order, that is, no adjustment of work tobe performed, update of history, or cost distribution will take place.

You can use customer exit IWO10027 to distribute the order costsproportionately to the objects in the object list. Customer exits are dealt with inthe following courses.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 64: Stock Material - Process Flow

You can plan materials that are required to execute the task for each operationin the maintenance order. The materials can be bill of material components forthe reference object or freely assigned materials.

The materials that you plan for the maintenance order will be reserved inthe warehouse, if they are kept in stock. You can set the reservation time inyour system using the Customizing function. In Customizing, it is decided,for each order type, whether the system should make the material reservationeffective or generate the purchase requisition immediately or only when theorder is released.

An availability check can be called up when components are assigned in theorder.

An automatic availability check is performed when the order is released. Theorder can also be released if there is no availability.

A material provision list and material withdrawal slips can be printed togetherwith the order papers.

Planned goods issues are entered with reference to the reservation, such asreservation number, unplanned goods issues with reference to the ordernumber.

The goods issues entered appear in the document flow of the order.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Material Purchase Through Maintenance Orders

Figure 65: Non-Stock Material � Process Flow

When components are assigned in the order, additional purchase informationcan be entered.

Depending on the order type, the purchase requisitions are generated eitherwhen the order is saved or released.

In purchasing, purchase orders are generated from purchase requisitions. Thepurchase order items are assigned to the maintenance order.

Goods receipts are entered with reference to the purchase order after the orderhas been put in process. The account assignment of the purchase order to theorder instigates the posting to the order.

When goods receipts are entered, the maintenance order is debited with thepurchase order value.

When the invoice is received, any invoice differences are automaticallycredited to, or debited from the maintenance order.

The goods receipts entered appear in the document flow of the order.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 66: Material Through Internet Catalog

The material planning in the maintenance order can be based on internetcatalogs, as well as on direct material assignment, and the use of BOMs.

From the order you can access an external catalog directly (R/3 Enterprise)or you can connect to the catalog through the EBP (Enterprise BuyerProfessional) component (R/3 4.6C).

Figure 67: Direct Catalog Access



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 68: Catalog access through EBP

A prerequisite for this process is that the EBP system�s Customizing must beset up on the back-end R/3 Enterprise. EBP and the back-end R/3 Enterpriseare linked to each other.

A possible process could be as follows:

Maintenance order is created in the back-end system.

EBP system is started through the URL (http://...).

Component planning is started, and the system looks for the order.

An operation is selected.

Components are sought in and selected from a catalog defined in the EBP.

The component list is transferred to the EBP where it is completed or changed.

The component list is then transferred to the back-end system.

The component list is copied and added to the operation, usually as anon-stock item.

When you save or release the order, a purchase requisition application isgenerated.

You can find further information on this topic in the PLM315 and EPR210courses.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 69: Central Address Management

The following objects are connected to the address management:

- Functional location

- Equipment

- Maintenance notification

- Maintenance order

- Component for non-stock material (order)

You also have the option of specifying the delivery address for non-stockmaterial in the order and transferring it to purchasing. The delivery addresscan also be derived automatically using definable rules.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Cost Analysis in Maintenance Order

Figure 70: Cost Analysis in Maintenance Order

You can display the expected costs in two ways:

At cost element level, that is, Controlling view.

At value category level, that is, Maintenance view.

In Customizing, cost elements are assigned to value categories.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 9: Order Planning

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Describe the structure of a maintenance order� Create operations� Plan material� Structure an object list� Manage addresses� Display the cost overview

Business ExampleOrder planning is done by a company to plan its resources and operationsand it also helps in the allocation of spare parts for the maintenance tasksto be performed. The order is the most important component in planningmaintenance tasks. Order planning can be done for internal processing or forexternal processing of maintenance function.

Task 1Creating Orders

Maintenance orders can be created in different ways:

From the notifications list

From an individual notification

Directly (without a notification)

1. You are the responsible maintenance planner and want to plan orders onthe basis of your notifications list.

Create a maintenance order for your malfunction report. How do youmake the selection? How do you proceed?

2. Which order type and which additional data is proposed and why?

Save the order. Which number is assigned to it?

Task 2Create an order from the processing of an individual maintenance notification




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


1. Create a maintenance order for your maintenance request and assignthe order type PM03.

Assign the order to your work center T-ME##and assign the businesscenter 1000.

How do you proceed?


2. Call up your order again using "Display maintenance order" and checkwhich data has been transferred to the order header.

Order short text

Order long text

Priority

Maintenance planner group

Required start date

Required end date

Task 3Create an order directly

1. The electric supply cables for three pumps in the clarification plant C1are to be replaced. Create an order for this work directly (that is, withoutreference to a maintenance notification). Use order type PM01. Make thenecessary entries in the object list.

How do you make entries in the object list and what equipment have youselected? Save the order.

Which number is assigned to it?

Task 4Operations

1. Enter operations for your maintenance orders. Use the existing standardtext (=standard text key) to do this.

Order 1:______

Order 2:______




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Order 3:______

Which standard texts have you used?

2. What extra step must be performed for order 3 (from exercise 2-3) withregard to the objects? When should you perform this step?

Task 5Material planning � General material

1. Assign material from the general material list to an operation in yourorder.

Order

Operation

Material number

Required quantity

2. Material planning - Material from the bill of material

In addition, assign a material to another operation in your order usingthe bill of material.

How should you proceed?

Which bill of material is proposed? Why?

Order

Operation

Material number (in BOM)

Quantity according to BOM

3. Material planning � Non-stock material

Assign a non-stock item to your order.

Operation

Material number

Item category




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Purchasing group

Price

Vendor

G/L account

Material group

4. Material planning � Delivery address non-stock material

Check the delivery address for your non-stock item. Which menu pathdo you use? Which specifications are made? Why? If you have not founda delivery address, enter a new one.

Name

Postal code/City

Street

Task 6Standard cost estimate � cost overview

1. Display the cost overview for your order. Which menu path do you use?Which valuation categories contain planned costs?

Value category Planned costs

2. Standard cost estimate - Planned/actual comparison

Determine the cost elements used by planned costs in your order. Whichmenu path do you use? Cost element Planned costs



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 9: Order PlanningTask 1Creating Orders

Maintenance orders can be created in different ways:

From the notifications list

From an individual notification

Directly (without a notification)

1. You are the responsible maintenance planner and want to plan orders onthe basis of your notifications list.

Create a maintenance order for your malfunction report. How do youmake the selection? How do you proceed?

a) Create an order from the notification list

SAP menu→Logistics→Plant Maintenance→Maintenance Processing→Notification→List Editing→Change

Select notification(s), and thenNotification→Assign order

or

Use �Generate Order� icon.

2. Which order type and which additional data is proposed and why?




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Save the order. Which number is assigned to it?

a)

Field name or datatype

Values

Order type The order type is proposed on the basisof a Customizing settingImportant: Theorder type can no longer be changed here

Data from malfunctionreport

Short text

Long text (depending on Customizing)

Basic dates Reference object Priority

Order number xxxxxx (assigned by the system aftersaving)

Task 2Create an order from the processing of an individual maintenance notification

1. Create a maintenance order for your maintenance request and assignthe order type PM03.

Assign the order to your work center T-ME##and assign the businesscenter 1000.

How do you proceed?




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y



a) Create order from individual notification processing

Access the maintenance notification as follows:

SAP menu →Logistics →Plant Maintenance →MaintenanceProcessing→Notification→ List Editing→Change

Select notification

Goto→ Notification

(from the notification header)

PM Notification→Order→Create→Direct

or

SAP menu→Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→MaintenanceProcessing→Notification→ Change

Enter notification number

(from the notification header) PM Notification→Order→Create→Direct

2. Call up your order again using "Display maintenance order" and checkwhich data has been transferred to the order header.

Order short text

Order long text

Priority





I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Required start date

Required end date

a) Create order directly

Data copied to the order header:


Order short text Yes

Order long text Depending on Customizing

Priority Yes

Maintenance planner group Yes

Required start date Yes

Required end date Yes

Task 3Create an order directly

1. The electric supply cables for three pumps in the clarification plant C1are to be replaced. Create an order for this work directly (that is, withoutreference to a maintenance notification). Use order type PM01. Make thenecessary entries in the object list.

How do you make entries in the object list and what equipment have youselected? Save the order.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Which number is assigned to it?

a) SAP menu→Logistics →Plant Maintenance→MaintenanceProcessing→Order→Create (General)

Select equipment:

Objects tab page→Equipment selection button

Selection conditions:

Object description *pump*

Functional location K1*

Equipment:

For example:


P-1000-N001 Electric pump 001



Task 4Operations

1. Enter operations for your maintenance orders. Use the existing standardtext (=standard text key) to do this.

Order 1:______

Order 2:______

Order 3:______




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Which standard texts have you used?

a) Plan order operations

SAP menu→Logistics →Plant Maintenance →MaintenanceProcessing→Order→ Change

Operations tab page

Standard texts:

For example, deactivate standard text key PM000001 and securitycheck, and so on.

2. What extra step must be performed for order 3 (from exercise 2-3) withregard to the objects? When should you perform this step?

a) Order 3 with object list:

You must set the execution factor for the operations according to theequipment entered in the object list.

SAP menu →Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→MaintenanceProcessing→Order→ Change

Operations tab page

Mark operation, Exec.fact. button (bottom right)

Hint: If possible, the factor should only be set if theoperations have been fully planned (and therefore aftermaterial planning), so that times and materials can beprojected accordingly.

Task 5Material planning � General material

1. Assign material from the general material list to an operation in yourorder.

Order

Operation




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Material number

Required quantity

a) Material planning � General material

SAP menu→Logistics→Plant Maintenance→Maintenance Processing→Order→Change

Operations tab page, double-click operation number

In the operation detail Components tab page


Order See exercises 2-1 to 2-3

Operation For example, 0010

Material number For example, 100-100

Required quantity For example, 12 pieces

2. Material planning - Material from the bill of material

In addition, assign a material to another operation in your order usingthe bill of material.


Which bill of material is proposed? Why?

Order

Operation




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Material number (in BOM)

Quantity according to BOM

a) Material planning - Material from the bill of material

SAP menu →Logistics→ Plant Maintenance → MaintenanceProcessing→Order→ Change



List button (=structure list)

Bills of material:

The system proposes the bill of material of material P-1000.

Reason: The piece of equipment does not have equipment BOM, butis assigned to construction type P-1000 (= material P-1000) whichhas a material BOM.


Order See exercises 2-1 to 2-3

Operation For example, 0020

Material number (in BOM) For example, 100-400

Quantity according to BOM For example, 1 piece

3. Material planning � Non-stock material

Assign a non-stock item to your order.

Operation

Material number

Item category

Purchasing group

Price

Vendor




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


G/L account

Material group

a) Material planning � Non-stock material

SAP menu→Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Maintenance Processing→Order→ Change




Item 0010

Description Enter as required

Material number None

Required quantity For example, 5

Item category N

Unit of measure For example, pc

Mark item and Purch button

Purchasing group 007

Price For example, 25 per unit ofmeasure

Vendor 1000

G/L account 415000

Material group For example, 007

4. Material planning � Delivery address non-stock material

Check the delivery address for your non-stock item. Which menu pathdo you use? Which specifications are made? Why? If you have not founda delivery address, enter a new one.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Name

Postal code/City

Street

a) Material planning � Delivery address non-stock material

SAP menu→ Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Maintenance Processing→Order→Change



Mark item and symbol with envelope (delivery address)


Name Astralis GmbH

Postal code/City DE 69190 Walldorf

Street Am neuen Schulhaus 4

Task 6Standard cost estimate � cost overview

1. Display the cost overview for your order. Which menu path do you use?Which valuation categories contain planned costs?




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Value category Planned costs

a) Standard cost estimate � cost overview

SAP menu →Logistics →Plant Maintenance →MaintenanceProcessing→Order→Change

Costs tab page

Value categories:

Value Category Planned Costs

Internal material Depending on planning

External material Depending on planning

Internal labor Depending on planning

2. Standard cost estimate - Planned/actual comparison

Determine the cost elements used by planned costs in your order. Whichmenu path do you use? Cost element Planned costs

a) Standard cost estimate - Planned/actual comparison

SAP menu→ Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Maintenance Processing→Order→ Change

Costs tab page

Extras→Cost reports→ Planned/actual comparison

Or

the button Planned/actual comparison in the cost overview

Cost element Planned Costs

400000Rawmaterials consumed Depending on planning

415000 External procurement Depending on planning

615000 Direct activity allocation Depending on planning

890000 Consumption ofsemifinished products

Depending on planning



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Identify the planning phase of the Corrective Maintenance process� Create a maintenance order� Explain material purchase through a maintenance order



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Lesson: Scheduling Maintenance Tasks

Lesson: Scheduling Maintenance Tasks

Lesson OverviewIn this lesson, you will identify the scheduling phase of the CorrectiveMaintenance cycle. You will also be able to select, release, and print theappropriate maintenance orders.


� Identify the scheduling phase of the Corrective Maintenance cycle� Select the appropriate maintenance orders� Release and print the maintenance orders

Business ExampleA maintenance planner in a company schedules the stock materials to executeorder operations. The system performs an availability check for all thematerials that have been assigned to the maintenance operation. In case ofany shortfall, the system gives an indication to the maintenance planner totake the necessary actions.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Scheduling Orders


Cycle for Corrective Maintenance has several steps. Here step 3, which isscheduling is being considered.

In this step the order is subjected to various checks: The material availabilityand the capacities required are checked and the required shop papers areprinted.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 72: Resource Planning: Availability Check

When you schedule stock materials to execute order operations, the systemuses the availability function to check in a single step whether all the materialsin the maintenance order are available in sufficient quantities.

The system now performs an availability check for all the materials assignedto the maintenance order in its operations, in accordance with the systemsettings and entries in the material master records. The system informs youof the result in an online message. In case of a lack of availability, you candisplay an error log containing the detailed data about the result of the check.

When you release a maintenance order, the system performs an availabilitycheck for planned materials depending on your Customizing settings. If thischeck reveals that certain planned materials are not available in sufficientquantities, you might not be able to release the maintenance order dependingon your system settings.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 73: Material Availability List

You can display information about the availability of materials planned for anorder in the material availability list.

For non-stock items, the list enables you to see whether the date for theplanned goods receipt from a purchase requisition or purchase order issufficient to meet the earliest or latest start date for the operation. You can alsosee why it might not be possible to meet the deadline for a planned goodsreceipt.

For items kept in stock, the quantity determined and confirmed by thematerial availability check is compared with the quantity required.

Note: The data in the list is not simulation data that determines themost favorable start date. The list displays valid material availabilityfor the order that the system has determined based on valid data.

You can also flag individual order components that are not relevant forplanning. No reservation or purchase requisition is generated from thesecomponents.

You can start the availability list within an order and from the list editingfunction for orders.

By calling the availability list from list editing, you can display the hit list atdifferent summation levels such as order level, orders with operations, orderswith operations and material items.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Selecting Maintenance Orders

Figure 74: Select Maintenance Orders

You use the selection function for maintenance orders if you want to:

Change or display a particular maintenance order, whose number you donot know.

Change or display several maintenance orders which have certain features.

Obtain an overview of specific maintenance orders which have certainfeatures.

Execute the same function for certain maintenance orders, for example,release, print, or completing them.

If you have created a list that contains all the maintenance orders or orderoperations, you can process it using the following functions:

o Re-sort list

o Search for particular character sequences in the list

o Mark list and list entries

o Change field selection on the list

o Scroll and set scroll columns



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


o Process list further with table calculations

o Display graphic for frequency statistics

o Display schedule overview

o Perform order functions on the list

o Download the list�s order data

The ABAP List Viewer that is similar to the notification list is used to displaythe hit list selection.

Figure 75: Maintenance Order: Multi-level Order Lists

When you create a multi-level order list, you receive a color-coded listcontaining all the groups of data that you requested on the selection screen.This provides an overview of all the important data contained in themaintenance order.

To process the list further, you can also:

Display the color legend

Show and hide data

Select the fields that which you want to display in the list for each data groupthat you choose from the selection screen



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Display the master record for each technical object in the list

Display the resources for each maintenance order required in the list

Download the data for the maintenance orders in the list

Order Release and Print

Figure 76: Order release

When you release a maintenance order, the system checks the availabilityof material, production resources/tools, and the necessary permits. At thelatest time of release when material reservations become relevant for materialsplanning, materials can be withdrawn and purchase requisitions generated.

You can perform only the following activities after releasing the order:

o Print shop papers

o Withdraw material

o Post goods receipts

o Enter time confirmations

o Complete the task

You can release a maintenance order immediately after creating it. This optionis available for maintenance orders created automatically by the system, forexample, orders from maintenance plans.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


To enable these orders to be released upon creation, the indicator Releaseimmediately must be set for the required order types by the systemadministration in Customizing.

Figure 77: Maintenance Order: Print

Job ticket: The job ticket is a document that gives the person executingthe maintenance work a complete overview of the order. If your systemis connected to the Document Management System (DMS), you can alsoprint graphics such as engineering/design drawings of the technical systemconcerned on the job ticket.

Operation control ticket: Provides the concerned maintenance engineer acomplete overview of the maintenance order. It also contains informationabout permits.

Material pick list: Shows the warehouse clerk the materials that have beenplanned for each operation in this order.

Object list: Shows an overview of the objects (technical objects, notifications)involved in the order.

Time ticket: Contains the standard time and duration and is only printedfor operations with the corresponding control key. For each manual workerinvolved on the order, time tickets are printed in the numbers specified foreach operation. The worker enters the time required to execute the operationon the time ticket.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Confirmation slip: Used by workers as an entry sheet for their work times.

Material withdrawal slip: Authorizes the person executing the maintenancework to take the materials required for the order from the warehouse. Onematerial withdrawal slip is printed for each material component.

Figure 78: Maintenance Order: Delta Print

You have the option of printing all the shop papers not yet printed for amaintenance order at once. This is known as delta printing. You can onlyuse delta printing if your system contains the required Customizing settingmade by your system administration.

Result of delta printing:

Only new operations, i.e. operations which have not been printed appear onthe job ticket and operation control ticket.

Time tickets are printed only if they do not yet have the status �Printed�.

Components are printed only if they have not been printed before on acomponent slip such as the material withdrawal slip.

The printouts are identified as delta printouts.

As soon as you have printed the shop papers for a maintenance order, thesystem automatically assigns the status �Printed� to the order and creates aprint log. You can use the print log to determine:

Which papers have already been printed for a maintenance order

Who initiated the printing



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


When the papers were printed

There is also an internal transaction (IW3D) for employees who can printorders but do not have the authority to change the overall order.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 10: Scheduling of MaintenanceTasks

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Select lists of maintenance orders� Perform an availability check for resources� Release orders� Print orders

Business ExampleThe maintenance planner in a company is responsible for scheduling thestock materials to execute order operations. He must ensure the availabilityof materials by carrying out an availability check through the system which,in case of any shortfall, gives an indication to the planner to take necessaryaction. The maintenance planner must also ensure that shop papers have beenprinted and an order has been released for processing.

Task 1Order Scheduling

1. Select all orders either outstanding or in process for order types PM01and PM02 up to the current date. Show the planned and actual costs inthe selection result.

How do you proceed?

2. Sort the selection result according to order type (first criterion) and basicstart date (second criterion). How do you proceed?

Create a totals line for the planned and actual costs and generate asubtotal for each order type.

How do you proceed?

Task 2Order Selection




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


1. Select all the maintenance orders you have created during this course.Which selection criteria do you choose? How can you save these selectioncriteria for future selections?

2. Configure the columns �Equipment�, �Notification� and �System status�in the resulting hit list.

How do you proceed?

How can this display variant be saved and defined as the standardvariant?

Task 31. Check the availability of the all required materials in stock for your order.

What function do you use?

What system message do you receive?

Which entries are shown in the availability log?

Task 41. Get an overview of the overall situation of all the materials in all of your

orders (that is, the materials in stock and those not in stock).

Which orders have missing parts?

Task 5Order release

1. Release all your outstanding orders. How do you proceed?

What are the consequences of the order release?

Task 6Shop paper printing

1. Print orders with print preview

Display the print preview for one of your orders, and print it on thedefault printer.

Which shop papers are printed?

2. Print log




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Call up your order again, and display the print log.

Which entries are included?



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 10: Scheduling of MaintenanceTasksTask 1Order Scheduling

1. Select all orders either outstanding or in process for order types PM01and PM02 up to the current date. Show the planned and actual costs inthe selection result.

How do you proceed?

a) Select:SAP menu→ Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→MaintenanceProcessing→ Order→Order List→ Change

Set statuses Outstanding and In process, set order types from PM01to PM02, delete From date for period; execute

Display / Sort fields:

Settings→ Layouts→ Current

Select Total planned costs and Total actual costs button and Copy

2. Sort the selection result according to order type (first criterion) and basicstart date (second criterion). How do you proceed?

Create a totals line for the planned and actual costs and generate asubtotal for each order type.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


How do you proceed?

a) Sorting

Mark OrdType column (by clicking on the column title) and dragbefore the Basic Start column (keep left mouse button pressed).

Select columns OrdType and Basic start and press button for sortascending

They are sorted according to order type and within order typeaccording to basic start date.

Totals row:

Select Total planned costs column and press Total button

In the column OrdType, position the cursor on order type PM01and press button Subtotal.

A dialog box appears.

Activate subtotal for order type (set checkmark)

A subtotal for planned costs and actual costs is created for eachorder type at the end of the table for the respective subtotal.

Task 2Order Selection




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


1. Select all the maintenance orders you have created during this course.Which selection criteria do you choose? How can you save these selectioncriteria for future selections?

a) SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→ MaintenanceProcessing→Order→Order List→ Change

For example:

Created by PLM300-## or

Planner group I## and

Creation Date From beginning of course to end of course

Save the selection variant:

Settings→ Layouts→ Save as variant Save layout:

U_PLM300-## (this is thereby the standard variant for the userPLM300-##)

Description: For example, my orders

2. Configure the columns �Equipment�, �Notification� and �System status�in the resulting hit list.

How do you proceed?

How can this display variant be saved and defined as the standardvariant?

a) Settings→ Layouts→ Current

Select equipment, notification, and system status from the hiddenfields and copy them to the active areaSettings→Layouts→Save asvariant

Enter variant name and description

Settings→Layouts→ Administration

Set selection (green checkmark) in the Default Setting field

Task 31. Check the availability of the all required materials in stock for your order.

What function do you use?

What system message do you receive?




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Which entries are shown in the availability log?

a) SAP menu→ Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Maintenance Processing→ Order→ Change Order→ Functions→ Availability→ Check StockMaterial

Message

All checked materials in order 9020xx are available

Availability log:

Goto→ Logs→Material availability Information message CO282: Nomissing material for order 9020xx

Note: The availability log is not saved together with theorder.

Task 41. Get an overview of the overall situation of all the materials in all of your

orders (that is, the materials in stock and those not in stock).

Which orders have missing parts?

a) SAP Menu→ Logistics→ Plant Maintenance → MaintenanceProcessing→ Order→ Order List→Change

Selection criteria as under 1-1 and execute;

Select all orders

Hint: You can select several lines in the order list (selectionhit list) by clicking on the desired line while simultaneouslypressing the SHIFT button (select block) or CTRL button(select several individual notifications).

Goto→ List of Available Material

There are no missing parts for orders with a green traffic lightsymbol, that is, both stock and non-stock materials are available.

Hint: Before the �Availability list�function can be used, atleast one regular availability check must have been executedfor the order.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Task 5Order release

1. Release all your outstanding orders. How do you proceed?

What are the consequences of the order release?

a) SAP menu →Logistics → Plant Maintenance→ MaintenanceProcessing→ Order→Order List→ Change

Selection criteria as under 1-1 and execute;

Release symbol (green flag)

or

SAP menu→ Logistics→ Plant Maintenance →MaintenanceProcessing→Order→ChangeOrder→ Functions→ Put in Process orRelease


Consequences� Order can be printed� Reservations become

effective� Material movements are

possible� Notifications can be

entered

Task 6Shop paper printing

1. Print orders with print preview

Display the print preview for one of your orders, and print it on thedefault printer.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Which shop papers are printed?

a) SAP menu→Logistics→Plant Maintenance→Maintenance Processing→Order→Change Order→Print→ Order

Print orders with print preview


Shop papers Control ticket

Material withdrawal slip

Job ticket

Material pick list

Order object list

Time ticket

2. Print log

Call up your order again, and display the print log.

Which entries are included?

a) SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance → MaintenanceProcessing→Order→ Change

Goto→Logs→ Print

Print log


For each printed shop paper Output device

Delta printing

Copy

User

Date

Time



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Identify the scheduling phase of the Corrective Maintenance cycle� Select the appropriate maintenance orders� Release and print the maintenance orders



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Lesson: Executing Maintenance Tasks

Lesson: Executing Maintenance Tasks

Lesson OverviewIn this lesson, you will be able to identify the execution phase of the CorrectiveMaintenance process. In addition, you will be able to describe materialwithdrawals and identify its types.


� Identify the execution phase of Corrective Maintenance process� Describe material withdrawals and identify its types

Business ExampleA company has implemented the SAP Corrective Maintenance process.Using this process, maintenance technicians can make planned or unplannedwithdrawal of stock material from company stores. The technicians can alsoidentify particular spare parts and their location across the plant using the"where-used" list feature of this process.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Executing Orders

Figure 79: The Cycle for Corrective Maintenance

The execution phase i.e. step 4 of the cycle for Corrective Maintenanceinvolves the withdrawal of spare parts from the warehouse and the actualexecution of the order.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 80: Material Withdrawal

Manual workers withdraw the material from the warehouse to perform themaintenance tasks. There are two types of withdrawal:

- Planned withdrawal of stock material

- Unplanned withdrawal of stock material

Material can also be procured externally.

The goods movement for a maintenance order are displayed in the documentflow of the order.

The Material Where-Used List (IW13) allows you to identify the materialwithdrawals that were planned and the ones that were not.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 11: Execution of MaintenanceTasks

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Create planned withdrawals of material� Create unplanned withdrawals of material

Business ExampleTo execute a maintenance task in a company, a maintenance technicianrequires spare parts which can be drawn from the company stores or they canbe procured externally. He can also identify a particular spare part and whereit is actually used across the plant.

Task 1Planned Material Withdrawal

1. Withdraw the reserved material with reference to the order number.How do you proceed?

Which materials do you withdraw?

Material Planned quantity Quantitywithdrawn

Which document number is assigned?

Task 2Unplanned Material Withdrawal

1. Make an additional, unplanned withdrawal of material for one of yourorders.

Movement type 261

Plant 1000

Storage location *




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Which material have you withdrawn? Which document number isassigned?



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 11: Execution of MaintenanceTasksTask 1Planned Material Withdrawal

1. Withdraw the reserved material with reference to the order number.How do you proceed?

Which materials do you withdraw?

Material Planned quantity Quantitywithdrawn




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y



a) SAP menu→ Logistics →Plant Maintenance→ MaintenanceProcessing→Completion Confirmation→Goods Movement→GoodsMovement


Movement type 261

Plant 1000

Storage location 0001

Button To order→ Enter order number

Material Planned quantity Quantity withdrawn

100-400 1 2

100-600 2 2

Document number: 4900xxxx

Alternatively:

SAP Menu→ Logistics→Materials Management→ InventoryManagement→ Goods Movement→Goods Movement (MIGO)

Task 2Unplanned Material Withdrawal

1. Make an additional, unplanned withdrawal of material for one of yourorders.

Movement type 261

Plant 1000

Storage location *




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Which material have you withdrawn? Which document number isassigned?

a) SAP menu→ Logistics→Plant Maintenance→Maintenance Processing→Completion Confirmation→Goods Movement→Goods Movement


Movement type 261

Plant 1000


ENTER (Do not press the button To order)


Material For example, 100-100

Order number Your order number

Document number: 4900xxxx

Hint: Entry using the "To order" button means that thesystem automatically searches for reservations in the order,that is, only planned withdrawals can be made using thisentry.

For unplanned withdrawals, which should nonethelessbe posted to the order, the system should not search forreservations, that is, entry should be after you have inputthe movement type, plant, and storage location simply bypressing ENTER (the RETURN key). Only then is the ordernumber entered.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Identify the execution phase of Corrective Maintenance process� Describe material withdrawals and identify its types



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Lesson: Completing Notifications and Orders

Lesson: Completing Notifications and Orders

Lesson OverviewIn this lesson, you will be able to identify the activities involved in confirmingand completing the maintenance orders. You will also be able to identifythe activities performed before and after the completion of the maintenancenotifications.

In addition, you will get an overview of the action logs.


� Identify the activities involved in completing themaintenance order� Identify the activities involved in completing the maintenance order

notification

Business ExampleA company has implemented the Corrective Maintenance process of SAP.After completing maintenance tasks, the maintenance supervisor needs tocomplete the maintenance order by confirming the time utilized to performthe task and record the technical findings about the maintenance functionsperformed. The Corrective Maintenance process enables its users to performall such activities. In addition, the process provides the function that recordsthe maintenance order in the maintenance history.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Maintenance Order Confirmation


Here, consider the final step in the cycle for Corrective Maintenance, that is,Completion.

After the work has been completed, the actual time required is confirmed. Thetechnical findings such as damage, cause of damage, or repairs performedand the effects of the damage on the asset�s condition are recorded in thetechnical confirmation.

The technical confirmation indicates that the order is finished for PlantMaintenance.

Business completion, which takes place after the order has been settled byControlling, marks the final completion of the order. Settlement and businesscompletion are dealt with in the PLM316 course.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Maintenance Notification Completion and Action Log

Figure 82: Order Confirmation: Times/Activities

There are three different ways to confirm the time required to complete amaintenance order:

Individual entry of times for each order operation

Collective entry by using direct entry or an operation list

Overall completion confirmation: Times, activities, measurement values, andso on, on a collective screen

Entry using the cross-application time sheet (CATS)

Once you enter the completion confirmations for operations/sub-operationsin a maintenance order, the system automatically assigns the status PCNF(Partially confirmed) to these operations/sub-operations, if no setting hasbeen made in Customizing that a final completion confirmation should beproposed automatically. As soon as all the operations/sub-operations ina maintenance order have been completely confirmed, the order itself isassigned the status CNF (Finally confirmed).

Since there is always a risk of completion confirmations being assigned to thewrong operations/sub-operations or entered with the wrong data, the systemallows you to reverse completion confirmations if required.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


You can enter the activities performed as maintenance notifications withnotification type �Activity report� and assign them to the corresponding order.Alternatively, you can enter confirmation texts with confirmations of time.However, the latter are not as easy to structure and analyze as activity reports.

You can enter the measurement readings as measurement documents for thereference object.

Figure 83: Technical Confirmation (1)

When technical objects are maintained, the most detailed technical findingspossible form the basis of a subsequent evaluation. Technical findings canprovide information on:

The cause of damage

Work executed (activities, tasks)

Exact location of damage and symptoms

Machine downtimes and system availability during and after the maintenancetask (system availability)

You can enter the findings either in the malfunction report in the request thatforms the basis of the order or in an activity report entered later for the order.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


When you complete the maintenance notification, the data is transferred tothe notification history. It is a part of the maintenance history and containsinformation related to the damage, malfunctions, causes, findings, andmaintenance work performed on each technical object.

Figure 84: Technical Confirmation (2)

If several technical objects have been assigned to the order using the objectlist, you can open a new maintenance notification for the respective objectfrom the object list. This means that each technical object has its own technicalconfirmation.

If you create an order on the basis of several notifications, these notificationswill feature in the object list and you can use them directly to record thetechnical findings.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 85: Overall Completion Confirmation

The overall completion confirmation enables you to confirm not only workingtimes, but also the relevant details for an order on a single screen, configuredto suit your individual requirements. You can process the time and technicalconfirmations in the same way.

Figure 86: Maintenance Order: Technical Completion (1)

You have two options:



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Complete the maintenance order and notification separately

Complete the maintenance order together with assigned notifications

To complete the order and notification together, there must be no outstandingtasks in the notification.

If there are any outstanding tasks (status OSTS) in a notification, thenotification cannot be completed. You need to ensure that all the tasks aremarked as finished. You can complete the order belonging to the notificationbecause the outstanding tasks must not necessarily belong to the orderperformed (in certain circumstances, a new order might be required for this).

All notifications with outstanding tasks can be identified easily from theirstatus (OSTS) and then processed.

Figure 87: Maintenance Order: Technical Completion (2)

The maintenance order obtains the status TECO (Technically completed).In other words, the maintenance work required for this order has beencompleted.

The maintenance order can then only be changed online as follows:

It can be locked or unlocked.

The deletion flag can be set.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


However, the order can still receive costs, for example, invoice receipts formaterials delivered and consumed, or from delayed time confirmations.

If you have not maintained a settlement rule for the maintenance order, it iscreated automatically by the system. If this is not possible owing to missingdata, the system directs you to where the settlement rule can be maintained.

All the purchase requisitions for which there are no purchase orders that stillexist for the maintenance order are marked with a deletion flag.

All open reservations and capacities that still exist for the maintenance orderare closed.

A reference date and time must be entered for the technical completion. Thisdepends on what periods are assigned to the order in the Plant MaintenanceInformation System (PMIS).

However, the reference date has no influence on the determination of thelocation- and account assignment data. This is determined from and set tothe day�s date when the order is created. If, for example, the cost center ofthe equipment changes during the order processing, you can - if necessary -use the Update Reference Object Datafunction (right mouse button) to updatethe order.

The order data and the data from maintenance notifications and usagehistories are available in the maintenance history and can be used for theevaluation of past work and the planning of new work.

Figure 88: Reverse Technical Completion



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


You can reverse the status TECO (technically completed) if required.

The order is given the status that it had before the technical completion, inother words, capacity requirements and reservations are restructured and thedeletion indicator is reset again for the unconverted purchase requisitions.

Figure 89: Document Flow

Figure 90: Maintenance Notification: Completion

Before you complete a maintenance notification, check whether:



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


All data that refers to the reference object for the maintenance notification isavailable and correct.

All the relevant item data is available and correct.

All the relevant task data is available and correct.

All tasks have been completed or released; there are no more outstandingtasks.

All technical data related to the breakdown and availability of the technicalsystem is available and correct.

When you complete a maintenance notification, the following occurs:

Reference date and time determine the periods assigned to the notification inthe Plant Maintenance Information System (PMIS).

The maintenance notification is locked for changes, which means that you canno longer change notification data.

The notification is assigned the status NOCO (Notification completed).

Figure 91: Action Log

An action log displays in chronological order any changes made to thenotifications, orders, equipment, and functional locations. This log enablesyou to track who has changed the data or status of which fields and when.

To use this function, you need to activate the creation of change documents forthe respective objects.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 12: Completion of MaintenanceNotification

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Enter time confirmations� Enter technical confirmations� Complete an order technically� Settle an order

Business ExampleOnce the maintenance task has been technically completed, the working timesare entered in the time confirmation, and the activities, damage, and causesof damage are entered in the technical confirmation. After the completionof maintenance work, the order gets the system status TECO (TechnicallyComplete) which implies that the maintenance work required for this orderhas been completed.

Task 11. What options for time confirmation do you know, and what characterizes

accessing each of these options?

Task 2Overall completion confirmation

1. Confirm the order you last processed using the overall completionconfirmation function.


How can you adapt the confirmation screen?

Task 3Technical completion confirmation in an existing maintenance notification

1. Enter a technical confirmation for the maintenance order that was createdbased on a maintenance notification (maintenance request).




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


How do you proceed?

Enter the following, if necessary:

Which data have you entered?

Damage

Cause of damage

Activities (code group/code)

Tasks (code group/code)

Hint: If tasks are entered in the notification, these always refer towork still to be executed.

The notification thereby obtains the system status OSTS.

Tasks must always be marked as finished before the notificationcan be completed.

Task 4Technical confirmation as a new maintenance notification.

1. Enter a technical confirmation for the maintenance order that you entereddirectly.

How do you proceed?


General technical description

Damage code

Cause of damage

Activities

Tasks





I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Damage

Cause of damage



Save the maintenance notification. Which number is assigned to thenotification?

Is the maintenance notification number transferred to the maintenanceorder?

No

Yes

Task 5Technical Completion

1. Complete all your maintenance orders and notifications. Use the orderlist for this. Which criteria do you enter to select all your maintenanceorders?

2. How are maintenance orders completed technically?

3. Complete the maintenance notifications at the same time. What do youhave to do?

4. What are the consequences of the technical completion of a maintenanceorder?

5. What are the consequences of the completion of a maintenancenotification?

Task 61. Which status does the order have after the technical completion?

What stages must the order go through after the technical completion?

Task 7Cost overview




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


1. Switch to the cost overview. Which value categories have estimated,planned, and actual costs?

ValueCategory

EstimatedCosts

PlannedCosts

Actual Costs



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 12: Completion of MaintenanceNotificationTask 11. What options for time confirmation do you know, and what characterizes

accessing each of these options?

a) Option 1:

SAP menu→ Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Maintenance Processing→Completion Confirmation→Entry→ Individual Time Confirmation

Usually used with an operation for the completion of an order.

Properties:

Goods movement possible, processing of the object list possible,measurement documents can be entered, maintenance notificationcan be created.

Option 2:

SAP menu →Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→ MaintenanceProcessing→Completion Confirmation→ Entry→Collective TimeConfirmation→With/Without Selection

Confirmation of several orders with more than one operation, eitherfrom an empty list or from a selection screen.

Properties:

Enter time data, time adjustment with HR (when an employeenumber is entered); if the operation detail data is called up, thefunctions can be executed as under Option 1 (apart from goodsmovements).

Option 3:

SAP menu→Logistics→Plant Maintenance→Maintenance Processing→Completion Confirmation→Entry→ Overall Completion Confirmation

Confirmation of an order with the option of performing anintegrated technical completion.

Properties:

Confirmation of times, technical findings, counterreadings/measurement documents, services, materials.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Option 4:

SAP menu→Logistics→Plant Maintenance→Maintenance Processing→ Order→Order List→Change

Enter selection parameter and output;

Select the desired orders in the order list, then Order→ CollectiveConfirmation or Order→ Overall Completion Confirmation

Properties:

See options 2 and 3.

Task 2Overall completion confirmation

1. Confirm the order you last processed using the overall completionconfirmation function.


How can you adapt the confirmation screen?

a) Overall completion confirmation:

SAP menu → Logistics → Plant Maintenance → MaintenanceProcessing→ Completion Confirmation→ Entry→ Overall CompletionConfirmation

A profile can be selected using Extras→ Settings, which determinesthe layout of the confirmation screen. The profiles are defined inCustomizing.

After the order number has been entered, release the data. All theoperations for the order are copied into the confirmation list.

Hint: If material withdrawals should also be posted in theoverall completion confirmation, proceed as follows:

In the time confirmation, select the corresponding operationand press the magnifying glass symbol in the same line (datafor the operation).

Materials which belong to the operations are displayed inthe goods movement (either sub-screen or pushbutton).




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Task 3Technical completion confirmation in an existing maintenance notification

1. Enter a technical confirmation for the maintenance order that was createdbased on a maintenance notification (maintenance request).

How do you proceed?



Damage

Cause of damage




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y




Hint: If tasks are entered in the notification, these always refer towork still to be executed.

The notification thereby obtains the system status OSTS.

Tasks must always be marked as finished before the notificationcan be completed.

a) Technical completion confirmation of an existing maintenancenotification

SAP menu → Logistics →Plant Maintenance→ MaintenanceProcessing→Order→Change

Button Notification

or

SAP menu→Logistics→Plant Maintenance→Maintenance Processing→Notification→ Change

Enter notification number


Damage For example, PUMP/100 1000

Cause of damage For example, PM02 1001

Activities (code group/code) For example, pump/101 2003For example, pump/101 2004For example, pump/101 2006

Tasks (code group/code) For example, PM01/100

Task 4Technical confirmation as a new maintenance notification.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


1. Enter a technical confirmation for the maintenance order that you entereddirectly.

How do you proceed?


General technical description

Damage code

Cause of damage

Activities

Tasks


Damage

Cause of damage



Save the maintenance notification. Which number is assigned to thenotification?

Is the maintenance notification number transferred to the maintenanceorder?

No




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Yes

a) Technical confirmation as a new maintenance notification

SAP menu→ Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→ MaintenanceProcessing→Order→Change

Button Notification, enter the notification type or button Objects,select entry, symbol Create notification


Damage For example, PUMP/100 1000

Cause of damage For example, PM02 1001

Activities (code group/code) For example, pump/101 2003For example, pump/101 2004For example, pump/101 2006

Tasks (code group/code) For example, PM01/100

Notification number:10000xxx

Is the maintenance notification number transferred to themaintenance order?

Yes

Task 5Technical Completion

1. Complete all your maintenance orders and notifications. Use the orderlist for this. Which criteria do you enter to select all your maintenanceorders?

a) SAP menu→ Logistics →Plant Maintenance →MaintenanceProcessing→Order→Order List→ Change

For example, entered by PLM300-xx or planner group I## andperiod from �start of course� until �end of course�

2. How are maintenance orders completed technically?

a) Selecting Orders

Order→Completion→ Complete (technically)or

Within an order: Pushbutton Technically CompleteContinued on next page



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


3. Complete the maintenance notifications at the same time. What do youhave to do?

a) Completing a Notification:

From the list editing:

Pushbutton �Incl. Notification�.

Select "Complete notifications" field in dialog box for reference time.

4. What are the consequences of the technical completion of a maintenanceorder?

a)


Consequences of ordercompletion � No more changes possible

� Status TECO� Outstanding reservations are

cleared� Outstanding capacity loads are

removed� Outstanding purchase order

requests are assigned a deletionflag

5. What are the consequences of the completion of a maintenancenotification?

a)


Consequences of notificationcompletion � Notification can no longer

be changed� Status NOCO

Task 61. Which status does the order have after the technical completion?




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


What stages must the order go through after the technical completion?

a) SAP menu→ Logistics →Plant Maintenance →MaintenanceProcessing→Order→Change

System Status


TECO Technically completed

CNF (Finally) confirmed

PRT Printed


MACM Material committed

PRC Pre-costed

The order must still go through the following stages of the process:

� Late confirmations must still be posted� Potential entry of invoices for external services� Order settlement (performed by Controlling)� Business completion (performed by Controlling)

Task 7Cost overview

1. Switch to the cost overview. Which value categories have estimated,planned, and actual costs?




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


ValueCategory

EstimatedCosts

PlannedCosts

Actual Costs

a) SAP menu→ Logistics →Plant Maintenance →MaintenanceProcessing→Order→Change

Costs tab page

Value category Estimatedcosts

Planned costs Actual costs

Internalmaterial

250,00 309,00 412,00

Externalmaterial

80,00 50,00 75,00

Internal labor 850,00 713,06 475,38



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Identify the activities involved in completing themaintenance order� Identify the activities involved in completing the maintenance order

notification



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Lesson: Purchasing External Services

Lesson: Purchasing External Services

Lesson OverviewIn this lesson, you will learn how to process external services and individualpurchases for maintenance orders. You will also be able to identify receiptsof goods and verify invoices. In addition, you will be able to identify theprocessing of maintenance orders at external work centers. Finally, you willbe able to describe the service procurement process.


� Process external services for maintenance orders� Process individual purchases for maintenance orders� Identify receipt of goods and verify invoices� Identify the processing of maintenance orders at external work centers� Describe the service procurement process

Business ExampleA company needs to process external services for capacity constraints, lackof specialized skill set, or considering cost factor; it might have a long-termrelationship with some specific vendors. The company can use the CorrectiveMaintenance process of SAP to process external services. The process canhandle external services by making individual purchase orders or by creatingexternal firms as work centers.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Processing External Services

Figure 92: How is an External Service Processed?

External services can be processed in three ways:

� Individual purchase order for sporadic requirements� External firm work center for regular requirements� Service item with individual purchase order and service specifications

and subsequent service entry.

The external assignment is triggered by the control key in the maintenanceorder or the work center of the operation.

The control key determines the type of external service assignment:

� PM01: The external assignment is processed using an internal orderwith an external work center.

� PM02: The external assignment is processed using a purchase requisitionand a standard individual normal purchase order.

� PM03: The external assignment is processed using an external operationwith service specifications and subsequent service entry.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 93: Outsourcing

To assign part of the work in a maintenance order to external companies, youcan use operations. You can divide up a maintenance order into operationsthat are performed by internal work centers and operations that are performedby external work centers.

In certain cases, you might need to assign a complete maintenance order toan external company. To do this, you create a maintenance order with onlyone operation, which you assign to an external company.

External companies can be mapped in two ways:

- As vendor master records

- As an external work center



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Processing Individual Purchases

Figure 94: Individual Purchase: Process

When External Services are planned in a maintenance order, a purchaserequisition is automatically triggered. You find the number of the purchaserequisition on the detail screen for external processing of the operation.

The purchasing department or maintenance planner converts the purchaserequisition into a purchase order.

External services are not confirmed with time confirmations, but using agoods receipt for the purchase order. The service is given the value of thepurchase price and entered in the accounts for Financial Accounting. Themaintenance order used to order the service is debited with this value.

In the maintenance order, you can see on the external processing screen for theoperation whether a goods receipt has been posted for the purchase order.

You can see the posted goods receipt quantity in the corresponding field.

The vendor invoice usually arrives after the delivery. For this reason, theoffsetting entry is put on a goods receipt - invoice receipt clearing account(GR/IR clearing account) and automatically written off on invoice receipt.Any differences between the purchase order value and invoice value aresubsequently debited from the order or credited to it.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 95: External Assignment Based on Hours or Fixed Price

You can assign an external operation on an hourly basis. The number of hoursand respective unit and price per hour (if known) are entered here on theexternal data screen for the operation.

However, you can assign an external operation based on a fixed price. Forthis, 1 SU (= service unit) for a fixed price is entered on the external datascreen for the operation.

Figure 96: Creating an Individual Purchase Order



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


A purchase order is usually created by the purchaser and is therefore not partof Plant Maintenance, but of Materials Management.

A purchase order can contain items for stock material, consumable material,or services.

Multiple account assignment for one item is possible. The goods receipts forthis item are entered without values.

Schedule lines can be used for a purchase order item to inform the vendorabout the different delivery times.

Goods Receipts and Invoice Verification

Figure 97: Order Status for Goods Receipt

After a goods receipt for an external operation is posted, the status �Externaloperation partially delivered (EOPD)� is set in the external operation.

If you have set the final delivery indicator on the goods receipt for an externalservice, the status �External operation delivery completed (EODL)� is set.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 98: Invoice Verification

The vendor invoice usually arrives after the delivery. For this reason, theoffsetting entry is put on a clearing account and automatically written offon invoice receipt. Any differences between the purchase order value andinvoice value are subsequently debited from the order or credited to it.

External Work Center Process

Figure 99: External Work Center: Process



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 100: Prerequisites

To process maintenance orders for external companies using external companywork centers, the following master data prerequisites must first be created:

� In Controlling, a common cost center is created for all external companies,or individual cost centers are created for each external company.

� In Controlling, one or more service types are created, depending onwhether:

- You are using one or more cost centers

- The external company has one charge rate or different rates

For the current fiscal year, you plan the rate for the cost center(s) and activitytype(s).

You set up amaintenance work center for the external company that has:

� Similar default values to internal work centers such as control key PM01.� A link to the cost center and activity type� You release a purchase order to the external company (vendor) that has:� Been assigned to the cost center of the external company� A certain validity period� The rate for the activity type as item price



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 101: Set Up Order

Standing orders are created and processed in the same way as internal orders.

Figure 102: Confirm Order

Standing orders are confirmed in the same way as internal orders.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 103: Settling a Maintenance Order

When you use an external company, the amount involved is credited to thecost center of the external company and debited against the maintenanceorder. The credit entry is made using the time confirmation.

The costs temporarily collected on the maintenance order are forwardedduring settlement to the receiver cost center specified in the settlement rule ofthe maintenance order such as equipment cost center.

To settle a maintenance order, the following prerequisites must be fulfilled:

� The maintenance order must have been released.� The maintenance order must have the status SETC (Settlement rule

created).� Costs not yet settled should be accumulated on the maintenance order.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 104: Billing Document and Controlling

Invoices are not received for every single activity, but periodically such asmonthly.

The total invoice amount contains the value of all the services executed sincethe last invoice was created. You can also display the list of orders executed asadditional information.

An invoice is assigned to the cost center of the external company (not to theindividual orders).

The cost center of the external company must be balanced in the medium term.

The total of all credited amounts (maintenance orders) = the total of all debitedamounts (billing documents).



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Service Procurement Process

Figure 105: Service Procurement: Process

Figure 106: Service Master Record

The service master record is created in Materials Management and contains aservice description and a unit of measure.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Every service master record can be linked with connections, which are thenautomatically proposed during order planning.

This data can be drawn from different SAP application components.

Figure 107: Model Service Specifications

You can schedule services in a maintenance order as individual service masterrecords (service numbers) or using model or standard service specifications.

Model service specifications are used to store frequently used servicespecifications. They form part of the service master data and are thereforemaintained in Materials Management.

This form of storage is suitable for all services, which you want to userepeatedly in a particular combination for different procurement operations.

For example, you can store all services, which are required for different pipelaying work, if necessary, grouped according to service areas, in a set of modelservice specifications �Pipe laying work�. You can use these model servicespecifications again later. This enables you to reduce the work required tocreate purchasing documents considerably.

You can use the model service specifications to assign services with the serviceselection function on the detail screen for the operation (processed internallyor externally).



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 108: Maintenance Order with Service Items

You can plan the maintenance order, which contains service items, as acomplete external order, possibly with its own order type, or as a combinedorder with internally processed operations and operations with service items.

The service item is generated in the operation using the control key. Thecontrol key carries the �Service� indicator, control key PM03 in the standardsystem.

If a control key is set in the operation using the service indicator, the tab page"Services," used to access service specifications, is added to the detail screenfor the operation.

Within the service specifications, you either schedule the required servicesusing a service number (service master record) or by entering them manuallywithout a service number.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 109: Maintenance Order and Purchase Requisition

When you save or release the order, a purchase requisition is generatedautomatically.

The purchase requisition contains the service specifications for the operation.

Figure 110: Purchase Requisition and Purchase Order

In purchasing, a purchase order is created from the purchase requisition.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


The purchase order item copies the service specifications from the purchaserequisition.

Figure 111: Entry Sheets for Services Provided

If a service has been provided by an external company, the service is enteredusing a service entry sheet, which is created with reference to the purchaseorder number.

The entry of the service performed is a function in Materials Management,but it can also be executed from Plant Maintenance using the completionconfirmation.

Data such as service location, internal and external employees are first enteredin the service entry sheet. You then enter the actual services provided in theservice specifications, which are copied to the service entry sheet.

Once you have entered all the services, the service entry sheet must beaccepted.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 112: Cost Update in Order

When the service entry sheet is accepted, the costs for the order are updated.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 13: Procurement of ExternalServices

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Configure a maintenance order for an external company for triggering an

individual purchase order� Perform further steps in external service processing

Business ExampleA company goes for external services in case of capacity constraints or lackof specialized skill set. It can also have a long-term relationship with somespecific vendors. The maintenance planner prepares an order detailing theoperations to be processed externally. Different processes can be used in PMdepending on the type of activity to be performed or the relationship withthe external company.

Task 1Maintenance Order with External Service

1. Create an order (order type PM01) for your piece of equipment TEQ-##.Create an operation for this order. However, the task should now beperformed by an external company.

Which control key must you use?

The external data screen appears. Enter the following data:

Operation quantity: 1 AU

Price: 5000 per: 1

Vendor: 1000 (optional)

The following data should appear automatically based on a settingin Customizing:

Cost element: 417000

Material group: 007

Purchasing group: 008




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Purchasing organization: 1000

Save your order.


Task 2Purchase Requisition

1. Display your maintenance order again and determine which purchaserequisition number has been generated.


What is the purchase requisition number?

Double-click the purchase requisition and determine the following data:

Delivery date

Desired vendor

Fixed vendor

Account assignment category

Task 3Additional Steps:

1. After the order is created, what are the steps in processing externalservices based on an individual purchase order? Note them down. As afurther exercise, you can also execute these steps in the system.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 13: Procurement of ExternalServicesTask 1Maintenance Order with External Service

1. Create an order (order type PM01) for your piece of equipment TEQ-##.Create an operation for this order. However, the task should now beperformed by an external company.


The external data screen appears. Enter the following data:

Operation quantity: 1 AU

Price: 5000 per: 1

Vendor: 1000 (optional)

The following data should appear automatically based on a settingin Customizing:


Material group: 007



Save your order.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y



a) Maintenance Order with External Service

SAP menu→ Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Maintenance Processing→ Order→ Create (General)

Operations tab page; control key: PM02

External processing screen:


Operation quantity 1 AU

Price 5000 per: 1

Cost element 417000

Material group 007

Purchasing group 008

Vendor 1000 (optional)

Purchasing organization 1000

Put order in process immediately, if necessary.

Order number: 9020xx






Delivery date

Desired vendor




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Fixed vendor


a) Purchase Requisition

SAP menu→ Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Maintenance Processing→ Order→ Change

�Operations� tab page, double-click operation number

Actual data tab page on detail screen

Purchase requisition number:1000xxxx

Purchase requisition details:

Delivery date Operation start date (*)

Desired vendor 1000

Fixed vendor 1000

Account assignment category F (= Order)

(*) The operation start- and �end date are identical here, as controlkey PM02 is not used for scheduling. That is, even if the durationof an operation was set, this does not mean that an end date iscalculated for the operation.

Task 3Additional Steps:




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


1. After the order is created, what are the steps in processing externalservices based on an individual purchase order? Note them down. As afurther exercise, you can also execute these steps in the system.

a) Additional Steps

1. The purchase requisition is converted to a purchase order inPurchasing.

Transaction: ME21N or ME21

2. A goods receipt is made for the purchase order. This receiptis then updated to the order.

Transaction: MIGO_GR

3. An invoice receipt is made for the purchase order. If there arediscrepancies between the goods and invoice receipts, these arecredited or debited to the order.

Transaction: MIRO



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 14: External services as serviceitems

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Configure a maintenance order, in which the contents of the work to be

performed are described, using service items� Display the relevant purchase requisition� Plan further processing steps

Business ExampleThe planning of external services using service master records enables youto assign all the important details, such as the standard description, unit ofmeasure, and price to the external operation using a service number withoutentering it manually.

Task 11. Maintenance Order with Service Items

Enter an order (order type PM01) for your clarification plant ## in whichpipes are to be laid. Create an operation for this order. The task shouldbe performed by an external company. The work should be describedusing service items.


2. Manual Service Item

Create at least one service item manually, that is, without reference to aservice master record (for example, cost plus work hours for a pumpfitter). Which data must you enter for this?

3. Service item with service master record

Create at least one service item by selecting an item using the keyword�Pipe� from the general service masters. How do you proceed?

Which service master records have you selected?




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Service Description Quantity/Unit Price

Which planned total value is displayed?

4. General purchasing data

Go to the general external data screen. Enter the following data if this hasnot been pre-defined using the relevant Customizing setting:


Material group: 007


Vendor: 1000


Save your order. Which order number is assigned?






Delivery date

Desired vendor

Fixed vendor


Check whether the services you requested have been transferred to thepurchase requisitions. How do you proceed?

2. Additional Steps:




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


After the order is created, what are the steps in processing for externalservices based on service items? Note them down. As a further exercise,you can also execute the steps in the system.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 14: External services as serviceitemsTask 11. Maintenance Order with Service Items

Enter an order (order type PM01) for your clarification plant ## in whichpipes are to be laid. Create an operation for this order. The task shouldbe performed by an external company. The work should be describedusing service items.


a) SAP menu→ Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Maintenance Processing→ Order→ Create (General)


Order type PM01

Functional location ##

Control key in operation PM03

2. Manual Service Item

Create at least one service item manually, that is, without reference to aservice master record (for example, cost plus work hours for a pumpfitter). Which data must you enter for this?

a) In the operation list for the order, double-click the operationnumber; the service specifications can be displayed on the detailscreen below the external data using a tab page.


Service number field Do not complete

Short text For example, diggings

Quantity For example, 15

Unit of measure For example, m³ (= cubic meters)

Price For example, $ 85 ( per cubic meter)




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


3. Service item with service master record

Create at least one service item by selecting an item using the keyword�Pipe� from the general service masters. How do you proceed?

Which service master records have you selected?

Service Description Quantity/Unit Price


a) Service item with service master record

Place the cursor on the Service number field and select individualservice items using the match code �Service short text� and entering*pipe* from the list of service masters.

Service master records, for example:

Servicenumber

Description Quantity/Unit Price

100029 PipeCut./GasWeld./Segt-Pipe Sectn w. ZMAK

1 piece 60 -EUR

100005 Transportation of asbestoscement pipe

3 piece 18 -EUR


Total of the Individual Conditions

4. General purchasing data

Go to the general external data screen. Enter the following data if this hasnot been pre-defined using the relevant Customizing setting:


Material group: 007


Vendor: 1000





I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Save your order. Which order number is assigned?

a) General purchasing data

In the operation list for the order, double-click the operationnumber; make entries on the external data screen (External tabpage is activated automatically by double clicking on the operationnumber).

Order number: 9020xx






Delivery date

Desired vendor

Fixed vendor





I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Check whether the services you requested have been transferred to thepurchase requisitions. How do you proceed?

a) Purchase Requisition

In the operation list for the order, double-click the operationsnumber; tab Actual data.

Purchase requisition number: 1000xxxx

Check purchase requisition:

Double-click the purchase requisition number; confirm screen"Service details" with ENTER, select item and using button "Itemdetail" (puzzle symbol), enter it in the item detail screen:

Delivery date Required end date of operation

Desired vendor 1000

Fixed vendor 1000

Account assignment category F (= Order)

Check services in the purchase requisition:

Double-click the purchase requisition number; confirm screen"Service details" with ENTER, select item and using button"Items" (hammer and screwdriver symbol), branch to the servicespecifications screen.

2. Additional Steps:




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


After the order is created, what are the steps in processing for externalservices based on service items? Note them down. As a further exercise,you can also execute the steps in the system.

a) Additional Steps:

1. The purchase requisition is converted to a purchase order inPurchasing. Transaction: ME21N or ME21.

2. A service entry is made for the purchase order using a serviceentry sheet (it is also possible to have several service entriesusing several service entry sheets for a purchase order).

Transaction: ML81N or ML81

3. The service entry sheet is released (if a release strategy hasbeen defined in MM Customizing). The release is triggered byentering release codes corresponding to the release strategy.


4. The service entry sheet is accepted. Acceptance enables theactual costs to be posted to the order.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Process external services for maintenance orders� Process individual purchases for maintenance orders� Identify receipt of goods and verify invoices� Identify the processing of maintenance orders at external work centers� Describe the service procurement process



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson: Explaining Mobile Solutions

Lesson OverviewIn this lesson, you will be able to identify and differentiate between onlineand offline mobile solutions.


� Identify online mobile solutions� Identify offline mobile solutions

Business ExampleSteve, maintenance engineer, carries out site inspection and records hisfindings, such as counter reading and damage code online with the help ofhis Personal Digital Assistant (PDA). He can update the SAP R/3 Enterpriseand create notification using his WAP enabled mobile phone. In the offlinescenario, he can capture data during his site inspection and can transfer thatdata into SAP back-end system.

Online Mobile Solutions

Figure 113: Online Scenario



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Lesson: Explaining Mobile Solutions

In Asset Lifecycle Management, the various inspection tasks can be carriedout using mobile devices.

The following scenarios are supported:

� Enter counter readings and measurement values on site� Enter damage codes� Create malfunction notification (optional)� Enter short text (only with HTML scenario)� Carry out the plausibility check of entered values

The advantages of the Online Scenario:

� Local independence� Immediate data entry� Improved data quality by avoiding transfer errors� Permanent access to current data

Technology:

� Mobile phone - WAP service IK72w� Wireless PDA - HTML service IK72hh

Figure 114: The System Landscape for Wireless Applications

For further information concerning the WAP scenario, see SAP Note 367222.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


For further information concerning the HTML scenario, see SAP Note 507570.

Offline Mobile Solutions

Figure 115: Offline Scenario

The Mobile Engine, part of the mySAP Mobile Business solution, enablesusers to process a large number of maintenance tasks offline on a PDA. Thereis no need to be connected to the back-end system.

The Mobile Engine provides:

� Data transfer to the PDA� A database to store the data locally� Synchronization with the SAP back-end Enterprise

The following functions are available:

� Display the technical objects� Display the notifications assigned to orders� Confirm actual times� Book goods issue for an order� Check local availability� Create and process orders/notifications (February 03)� Install/dismantle equipment



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


� Create measurement documents� Manage local material

A Local Profile Manager (LPM) helps create customized input screens.

The advantages of the Offline Scenario:

� Mobile processing of complex maintenance tasks� Offline processing� Runs on almost any PDA

Technology:

� Mobile Engine (mySAP Mobile Business)

Figure 116: Mobile Business Architecture



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 117: System Requirements for Mobile Engine

Further information:

www.sap.com/solutions/mobilebusiness

System Requirements for Mobile Engine:

Client

� Mobile Engine 2.1 (with Java Virtual Machine)� Web browser� PDA (Pocket PC) or laptop (Win OS)

Server

� Web Application Server 6.20� Web server supporting Java servlets� Synchronization server

Back-end

� R/3 4.6B, 4.6C and R/3 Enterprise� mySAP PLM Asset Lifecycle Management must be installed



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Identify online mobile solutions� Identify offline mobile solutions



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit Summary PLM300

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Identify the various phases of the Corrective Maintenance process� Create maintenance notifications� Identify the structure of a maintenance notification� Identify the various objects in maintenance notification� Select maintenance notification� Identify the planning phase of the Corrective Maintenance process� Create a maintenance order� Explain material purchase through a maintenance order� Identify the scheduling phase of the Corrective Maintenance cycle� Select the appropriate maintenance orders� Release and print the maintenance orders� Identify the execution phase of Corrective Maintenance process� Describe material withdrawals and identify its types� Identify the activities involved in completing themaintenance order� Identify the activities involved in completing the maintenance order

notification� Process external services for maintenance orders� Process individual purchases for maintenance orders� Identify receipt of goods and verify invoices� Identify the processing of maintenance orders at external work centers� Describe the service procurement process� Identify online mobile solutions� Identify offline mobile solutions



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Test Your Knowledge

1. In the Corrective Maintenance process, maintenance requirementsare collected within notifications and then dealt with during orderprocessing.Determine whether this statement is true or false.

TrueFalse

2. Maintenance Notifications can be entered without specifying an objectnumber.Determine whether this statement is true or false.

TrueFalse

3. Activities document data that can be used to determine a problem,damage, or the activity executed.Determine whether this statement is true or false.

TrueFalse

4. In ABAP List Viewer, there is an option to :Choose the correct answer(s).

A Move columns using Drag & DropB Make rows narrower or widerC Select a listD Sort a list

5. List two advantages of catalogs.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


6. Allocation of spare parts can be done in the planning phase of thecorrective maintenance process.Determine whether this statement is true or false.

TrueFalse

7. Material withdrawal slip Material withdrawal slip authorizes the personexecuting the maintenance work to take the material required for theorder from the warehouse.Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence.

8. The EBP system�s Customizing Customizing must be set up on theback-end SAP R/3 Enterprise.Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence.

9. The Object list Object list displays an overview of the objects involvedin the order.Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence.

10. An order is subjected to various checks in the scheduling phase.Determine whether this statement is true or false.

TrueFalse

11. The ABAP List Viewer ABAP List Viewer displays the hit list selection.Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence.

12. Identify the steps performed in the execution phase of CorrectiveMaintenance process.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


13. The planning phase of the Corrective Maintenance cycle involves thewithdrawal of spare parts from the warehouse and the execution of theorder.Determine whether this statement is true or false.

TrueFalse

14. What are the different ways to confirm the time required for work on amaintenance order?

15. Changes to notifications, orders, equipment, and functional locations aredisplayed in chronological order in a/an action log action log.Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence.

16. To settle a maintenance order, you must fulfill the following prerequisites:Choose the correct answer(s).

A Ensure the maintenance order is released.B Ensure the maintenance order has the status TECO (Technically

Complete).C Ensure the costs not yet settled should be accumulated on

the maintenance order.D Ensure the maintenance order has been printed.

17. A control key in the maintenance order or a work center of the operationtriggers an external assignment external assignment.Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence.

18. When goods receipts are entered, the maintenance order is debited withthe purchase order value purchase order value.Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


19. Explain the need for using operations to assign part of the work in amaintenance order to external companies.

20. Standing orders are created in the same way as internal orders.Determine whether this statement is true or false.

TrueFalse

21. Using mobile devices in maintenance tasks has advantages only in onlinescenario.Determine whether this statement is true or false.

TrueFalse

22. The Mobile Engine provides synchronization withSAP back-end SAP back-end Enterprise.Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Answers

1. In the Corrective Maintenance process, maintenance requirementsare collected within notifications and then dealt with during orderprocessing.

Answer: True

In a Corrective Maintenance process, maintenance requirements arecollected and then dealt with during order processing.

2. Maintenance Notifications can be entered without specifying an objectnumber.

Answer: True

Maintenance Notifications can be entered without specifying an objectnumber. For example, notifications can be entered for a malfunctionreport that refers to an object, which is not managed in the system undera number.

3. Activities document data that can be used to determine a problem,damage, or the activity executed.

Answer: False

Activities document data that can be used to determine a problem,damage, or the activity executed.

4. In ABAP List Viewer, there is an option to :

Answer: A, C, D

ABAP List Viewer enables you to move columns using drag and drop,widen or narrow columns, and select or sort lists.

5. List two advantages of catalogs.

Answer: The advantages of catalogs include ensuring the absence ofincorrect entries and using codes as the starting point for workflowsand follow-up actions.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


6. Allocation of spare parts can be done in the planning phase of thecorrective maintenance process.

Answer: True

In the planning phase of the corrective maintenance process, variousplanning tasks including creation of operations, reservation of spareparts, or planning of usage times are performed.

7. Material withdrawal slip authorizes the person executing themaintenance work to take the material required for the order from thewarehouse.

Answer: Material withdrawal slip

8. The EBP system�s Customizing must be set up on the back-end SAPR/3 Enterprise.

Answer: Customizing

9. The Object list displays an overview of the objects involved in the order.

Answer: Object list

10. An order is subjected to various checks in the scheduling phase.

Answer: True

An order is subjected to various checks in the scheduling phase.

11. The ABAP List Viewer displays the hit list selection.

Answer: ABAP List Viewer

12. Identify the steps performed in the execution phase of CorrectiveMaintenance process.

Answer: The execution of maintenance task involves the withdrawal ofstock materials from the warehouse with the help of manual workers.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


13. The planning phase of the Corrective Maintenance cycle involves thewithdrawal of spare parts from the warehouse and the execution of theorder.

Answer: False

The execution phase of the Corrective Maintenance cycle involves thewithdrawal of spare parts from the warehouse and the execution of theorder.

14. What are the different ways to confirm the time required for work on amaintenance order?

Answer: The four ways to confirm the time required for work on amaintenance order include: individual entry of times for each orderoperation, collective entry by direct entry or using an operation list,overall completion confirmation, and entry using the cross-applicationtime sheet (CATS).

15. Changes to notifications, orders, equipment, and functional locations aredisplayed in chronological order in a/an action log.

Answer: action log

16. To settle a maintenance order, you must fulfill the following prerequisites:

Answer: A, C

The status of the maintenance order should have the status SETC(Settlement rule created) instead of TECO.

17. A control key in the maintenance order or a work center of the operationtriggers an external assignment.

Answer: external assignment

18. When goods receipts are entered, the maintenance order is debited withthe purchase order value.

Answer: purchase order value



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


19. Explain the need for using operations to assign part of the work in amaintenance order to external companies.

Answer: Using operations to assign part of the work in a maintenanceorder to external companies helps dividing the order into operationsperformed by internal and external work centers.

20. Standing orders are created in the same way as internal orders.

Answer: True

Standing orders are created in the same way as internal orders.

21. Using mobile devices in maintenance tasks has advantages only in onlinescenario.

Answer: False

There are several advantages of using mobile devices in offline scenariotoo.

22. The Mobile Engine provides synchronization with SAP back-endEnterprise.

Answer: SAP back-end



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 6Refurbishment of Spare Parts

Unit OverviewIn this unit, you will be able to describe the refurbishment process. You willalso be able to create refurbishment orders. Finally, you will be able to postinward and outward stock movement of materials with condition-basedvaluation.


� Define refurbishment� Explain the refurbishment process flow� Specify the Valuation Type and Category� Explain the moving average price in the Material Master� Define and create a refurbishment order� Post stock movements

Unit ContentsLesson: Refurbishment and Material Master Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278

Exercise 15: The Material Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287Exercise 16: Refurbishment Order ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293Exercise 17: Inventory Management and Controlling.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301


I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 6: Refurbishment of Spare Parts PLM300

Lesson: Refurbishment and Material Master Details

Lesson OverviewThis lesson will help you define refurbishment. You will be able to describethe 5 phases of the refurbishment process flow. Next, you will be able toidentify valuation category and type in a Material Master Record. In addition,you will be able to explain and calculate the moving average price.


� Define refurbishment� Explain the refurbishment process flow� Specify the Valuation Type and Category� Explain the moving average price in the Material Master� Define and create a refurbishment order� Post stock movements

Business ExampleIn a company, refurbishing defective, high quality, and repairable spares isextremely important and forms a core process of maintenance. Refurbishmentis more cost effective than the purchase of new components. In real timemaintenance or repair tasks, a defective item of equipment is replaced. Themaintenance order however contains only the material consumption for thenew item. If you intend to refurbish rather than scrap the defective item, therefurbishment process starts. The defective item of the equipment is postedand stored in the spare parts warehouse.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Lesson: Refurbishment and Material Master Details

The Refurbishment Process

Figure 118: Refurbishment of Spare Parts: Process

At International Demonstration and Education System (IDES), defectiveor worn-out spare parts in storage should be refurbished. A material withcondition-based valuation is used for this. In exceptional cases, equipment isalso refurbished.

Step 1: The first step is to initiate the refurbishment on the basis of a certainamount of defect spare parts in storage.

Step 2: As soon as the number of defective repairable spares in thewarehouse reaches a certain level, the maintenance planner responsiblecreates a refurbishment order. The planner defines the time allowed for therefurbishment and plans all the operations, materials, and tools, required forthe refurbishment. After planning, the refurbishment order is released.

Step 3: The employees responsible withdraw the defective/used repairablespares and any other materials planned in the order, which are required forthe refurbishment, from the warehouse.

Step 4: Time and material resources are needed for the refurbishment.

Step 5: The repaired/refurbished repairable spares are returned to thewarehouse per goods receipt in accordance with the order planning. Theorder is confirmed and completed.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Valuation Type and Category in Material Master

Figure 119: Valuation category and valuation type

In the material master record, a price is defined for the material in eachvaluation area, that is, the plant or company code. In some cases, you mightneed several prices for the same material within a valuation area (separatematerial valuation) if, for example, there are different conditions of a materialwhich should be valued separately.

The prerequisite for valuing a material separately is the indicator of thematerial using the valuation category , for example, C for valuation bycondition, as valued separately. The valuation category is part of theaccounting data of the material.

Each material that is intended for separate valuation can be classified in thecorresponding movement types, for example, new, refurbished, defect. Themovement type corresponds to a condition.

Movement types and movement categories are maintained in the MaterialsManagement Customizing.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 120: Valuation Category and Type in Material Master

Two types of data are available for a valuation type:

Valuation data such as valuation price, total stock, total stock value, whichis defined for each valuation type in the valuation area and applies to allassociated storage locations.

Stock data that is managed per storage location such as batch data. If thematerial valued separately is to be handled in batches, the stock data isnot managed per valuation type but per batch. Each batch is assigned toa valuation type.

The stock quantity, stock value and valuation price for all the valuation typesare accumulated at valuation area level. This results in the moving averageprice for the material.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 121: Condition-Based Material Valuation

If a material is valued separately, this material is managed in various partialstocks, and each partial stock is valued separately.

Every operation subject to valuation, whether it is a goods receipt, goods issueor inventory, is performed at partial-stock level. When processing one ofthese operations, specify which partial stock is involved. This ensures thatonly the value of the partial stock concerned is changed; the other partialstocks remain unaffected.

In addition to partial stocks, the overall stock is also updated. The valuecalculated for the overall stock is derived from the total of stock values andstock quantities for the individual partial stocks.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Moving Average Price in Material Master

Figure 122: Moving Average Price

The stock quantity, stock value, and valuation price for all valuation types areaccumulated at the valuation area level. The result is the moving averageprice for the material.

The stocks for a material valued separately are managed separately for eachvaluation type. These are compiled in the valuation header. The individualstock quantities and stock values are totalled here. A moving average priceis calculated from the values for the individual valuation types and stockquantities.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Defining the Refurbishment Order

Figure 123: The Refurbishment Order

The structure of the refurbishment order essentially corresponds to thestructure of the maintenance order. When creating a refurbishment order,you have to enter the following data:

� Material number to be refurbished� Quantity to be refurbished� Actual condition to be refurbished (for example, C3)� Target condition to be achieved (for example, C2)

Posting Stock Movements

Figure 124: Refurbishment Order: Stock Withdrawal



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


When a refurbishment order is created, the following planned goodsmovements of parts to be refurbished are generated in the background:

Automatic creation of material to be provided (�from� condition) as ordercomponent.

Automatic creation of material to be delivered (�to� condition) as materialreceipt element.

The goods issue of the material to be provided (�from� condition) is madeas a planned material withdrawal using movement type 261 with referenceto the order number.

Figure 125: Refurbishment Order: Inward Stock Movement

The goods receipt can be posted either using the Materials Managementtransactions or using a special transaction in the confirmation area of PlantMaintenance (IW8W).

The goods receipt of the material to be delivered (�from� condition) is madeas a planned goods receipt using movement type 101 with reference to theorder number.

If the valuation types (partial stocks) have a valuation with standard price, thefinal change of the stock value of the material takes place at this time: a C3part with the standard price, a C2 part with the standard price more in stock.This leads to a new floating average price at the material level. The effectiveexpenditure of the order is not taken into account for this constellation. It isposted to a price difference account for the order settlement.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 126: Effect of Refurbishment on Stock Value of Material

If the movement types (partial stocks) have a valuation with a floatingaverage price, then the overall stock value of the material rises by the effectiveexpenditure of the order (working time + material/ here: 5 hours at a total of250 + 100 for the residual value of the defect part) after settlement.

This, in turn, leads to a rise in the floating average price at the overall materiallevel, depending on the expenditure of the order, not on the valuation price ofthe partial stock.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 15: The Material Master

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Display the material master� Determine the valuation category and valuation types� Determine stocks and valuations

Business ExampleWarehouse-based refurbishment is based on condition-based valuation of thematerial, for which the different conditions are represented using internalvaluation types. In this way, a verification document concerning the value ofthe change to the material can be maintained for refurbishment.

TaskDisplay the material master

1. A certain quantity of defective pumps with material number T-FP1##hasbeen collected in the warehouse. These should now be refurbished.

However, before the refurbishment starts, you want to obtain anoverview of certain core data for this material.

Call up the accounting data of the material master T-FP1## for the plant1000.


Determine the following data

Description

Price control

Valuation category

Moving average price

Standard price

Total stock

Total value




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


2. To represent different conditions (new, refurbished, defective), thematerial has different valuation types.

Which valuation types have been defined for the material T-FP1##?

Determine the following data for each valuation type:

Valuation type Valuation type Valuationtype

Valuationcategory

Price control

Movingaverage price

Standardprice

Total stock

Total value

3. Stock balance display displays an overview of the stock.


How do you limit the selection?

Determine the following stock values:

Unrestricteduse

Reserved Open purchaseorder quantity

Plant 1000

Storage location0001

Batch:

Batch:

Batch:



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 15: The Material MasterTaskDisplay the material master

1. A certain quantity of defective pumps with material number T-FP1##hasbeen collected in the warehouse. These should now be refurbished.

However, before the refurbishment starts, you want to obtain anoverview of certain core data for this material.

Call up the accounting data of the material master T-FP1## for the plant1000.


Determine the following data

Description

Price control

Valuation category

Moving average price

Standard price




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Total stock

Total value

a) Display the Material Master

SAP menu→ Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Management ofTechnical Objects→Material→ Display

Data at header level


Description Normal suction pump SIHI200-100

Price control V

Valuation category C

Moving average price 2.050,00

Standard price 2.456,90

Total stock 40

Total value 82.000,00

2. To represent different conditions (new, refurbished, defective), thematerial has different valuation types.

Which valuation types have been defined for the material T-FP1##?

Determine the following data for each valuation type:


Valuationcategory

Price control

Movingaverage price

Standardprice




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y



Total stock

Total value

a) Display valuation types

SAP menu→ Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→ Technical Objects→ Material→ Display

Enter material number T-FP1##and choose Accounting view;

call up F4 Help in the Valuation type field

The following valuation types appear:

C1, C2 and C3

Valuation typeC1 ValuationtypeC2

ValuationtypeC3

Valuationcategory

C C C

Price control S S S

Moving averageprice

3000,00 2500,00 200,00

Standard price 3000,00 2500,00 200,00

Total stock 10 20 10

Total value 30000,00 50000,00 2000,00

3. Stock balance display displays an overview of the stock.


How do you limit the selection?

Determine the following stock values:




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Unrestricteduse

Reserved Open purchaseorder quantity

Plant 1000


Batch:

Batch:

Batch:

a) Stock balance display

SAP menu→ Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Management ofTechnical Objects→Material→ Display

In the material:

Environment→ Stock overview

or

SAP menu→ Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Management ofTechnical Objects→Material→ Stock Overview

Stock values:

Unrestricted use Reserved

Plant 1000 40 0


40 0

Batch: C1 10 0

Batch: C2 20 0

Batch: C3 10 0



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 16: Refurbishment Order

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Configure and process a refurbishment order� Perform a material withdrawal and material receipt

Business ExampleRefurbishment processing is performed using an order type configured forthis purpose. This enables you to perform refurbishment for material andpieces of equipment linked to a material number.

Task 11. Create a refurbishment order for material T-FP1## from batch C3, using

the following data:

Order type: PM04

Maintenance planning plant: 1000

Business area: 1000

Maintenance planner group: I##

Person responsible Work center: T-ME##

Total quantity: 1 piece

From plant/storage location/valuation type: 1000 / 0001 / C3

To plant/storage location/valuation type: 1000 / 0001 / C2


Task 2Operations

1. Create the operations you regard as necessary to process the order. Usework center T-ME##and control key PM01 each time.

Task 3Material planning




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


1. Check the component list for operation 0010.

Which entries can you see?

Material number

Quantity

Item category

Plant

Storage location

Batch

Plan further spare parts that you regard as necessary for processing theorder.

Which did you plan?



Task 4Material withdrawal

1. Withdraw the material planned for your order.

How do you proceed?


Task 5Time confirmation

1. Enter the actual time for your order using single entry or collective entry.Set the final confirmation indicator each time.

How many hours have you confirmed in total?

Task 6Goods receipt

1. Post the return of the refurbished part to the warehouse for your order.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


How do you proceed?




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 16: Refurbishment OrderTask 11. Create a refurbishment order for material T-FP1## from batch C3, using

the following data:

Order type: PM04

Maintenance planning plant: 1000

Business area: 1000

Maintenance planner group: I##

Person responsible Work center: T-ME##

Total quantity: 1 piece

From plant/storage location/valuation type: 1000 / 0001 / C3

To plant/storage location/valuation type: 1000 / 0001 / C2


a) SAP menu→ Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→ MaintenanceProcessing→ Order→ Create (Special)→ Refurbishment order


Order type PM04

Material T-FP1##

Planning plant 1000

Business area 1000

Maintenance planner group I##

Person responsible Work center T-ME##

Total quantity 1 piece

From plant/storage location/valu-ation type

1000 / 0001 / C3

To plant/storage location/valua-tion type

1000 / 0001 / C2




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Task 2Operations

1. Create the operations you regard as necessary to process the order. Usework center T-ME##and control key PM01 each time.

a) In the order, "Operations" tab page

Enter useful operations for performing refurbishment.

Task 3Material planning

1. Check the component list for operation 0010.

Which entries can you see?

Material number

Quantity

Item category

Plant

Storage location

Batch

Plan further spare parts that you regard as necessary for processing theorder.

Which did you plan?





I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y



a) From the operation list, double-click operation number 0010:

The system branches to the internal processing screen for theoperation that displays the component list in the lower screen area.

Component T-FP1## is scheduled automatically with the followingdata:


Material number T-FP1##

Quantity 1

Item category L

Plant 1000


Batch C3

Plan additional material using free material assignment (executeF4 help in the field Components and search, for example, for amaterial short text); possible materials: 100-100, 100-400, 100-431,and 100-600.

Choose the Put in process button;

Task 4Material withdrawal

1. Withdraw the material planned for your order.

How do you proceed?




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y



a) SAP menu→ Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→ MaintenanceProcessing→ Completion Confirmation→ Goods Movement


Movement type 261

Plant 1000


Material T-FP1##

serial number For example, 41

Choose button "To order..." and enter order number; save.

Task 5Time confirmation

1. Enter the actual time for your order using single entry or collective entry.Set the final confirmation indicator each time.

How many hours have you confirmed in total?

a) SAP menu→ Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→ MaintenanceProcessing → Completion Confirmation → Entry→ OverallCompletion Confirmation

or

SAP menu→ Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→ MaintenanceProcessing→ Completion Confirmation→ Entry→ IndividualTime Confirmation

Task 6Goods receipt

1. Post the return of the refurbished part to the warehouse for your order.

How do you proceed?




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y



a) SAP menu→ Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→ MaintenanceProcessing→ Completion Confirmation→ Goods Movement→Refurbishment Goods Receipt

Enter order number from 2-3

In �Activity� area, activate Change batch/valuation type + Postsgoods receipt (this is the standard setting)

Control data in �Data for goods receipt� area

Save



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 17: Inventory Management andControlling

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Settle a refurbishment order� Check stocks� Perform a cost analysis for the order

Business ExampleThe refurbishment order is settled directly to the material. Depending on theprice control of the condition batches (valuation types), values are assignedbased on the standard price of the valuation type or the actual resourcesrequired.

The check can also be made using the cost report in the order.

Task 1Cost Analysis of the Order

1. Call the cost report for the planned/actual comparison and check whichcredits and debits the order has before settlement.

How do you proceed?

Cost element debit Actual costs

Cost element credit




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Task 21. Which settlement rule is used for the order?

Task 31. When is the stock value changed for material T-FP1##and why?

Are the actual working time and spare parts required considered whenthe stock value is changed?



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 17: Inventory Management andControllingTask 1Cost Analysis of the Order

1. Call the cost report for the planned/actual comparison and check whichcredits and debits the order has before settlement.

How do you proceed?


Cost element credit




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


a) SAP menu→ Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→ MaintenanceProcessing→ Order→ Change

Extras→ Cost reports→ Planned/actual comparison


404000 Spare parts For example, 200

615000 Direct activityallocation

For example, 129. 53

655901 Overhead rates None, since these cannot be calculatedautomatically

Cost types delivery

895000 Factory production For example, 2,500

Hint: The service provided by the refurbishment is posted tothe order as credit in the form of negative costs.

The value results from the values assigned to the C2 batch ofmaterial T-FP1## (standard price valuation).

Task 21. Which settlement rule is used for the order?

a) SAP menu→ Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→ MaintenanceProcessing→ Order→ Change

Goto→ Settlement rule

MAT T-FP1##100% GES settlement rule is created automatically.

The settlement is made directly to the material.Continued on next page



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Task 31. When is the stock value changed for material T-FP1##and why?

Are the actual working time and spare parts required considered whenthe stock value is changed?

a) Since the material T-FP1##has a standard price valuation at thelevel of valuation type (= batch), the stock value is changed for thereturn of the refurbished part to the warehouse (in batch C2).

As a result of the standard price valuation, an item received in theC2 batch is always assigned the value 2,500 and thereby leads to anincrease in the stock value at the overall material level.

The actual working time and spare parts required are not consideredfor the standard price valuation of batches.

The resources required can only be considered if a moving averageprice has been agreed at the batch level. The actual resourcesrequired are then settled to the material when the order is settled(not when it reaches the warehouse).



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Define refurbishment� Explain the refurbishment process flow� Specify the Valuation Type and Category� Explain the moving average price in the Material Master� Define and create a refurbishment order� Post stock movements



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Unit Summary

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Define refurbishment� Explain the refurbishment process flow� Specify the Valuation Type and Category� Explain the moving average price in the Material Master� Define and create a refurbishment order� Post stock movements



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit Summary PLM300



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Test Your Knowledge

1. Both materials with serial numbers and materials without serial numberscan be refurbished.Determine whether this statement is true or false.

TrueFalse

2. Where does the repaired/refurbished repairable spares go afterrefurbishment?

3. Stock quantity Stock quantity, stock value stock value, andvaluation price valuation price for all the valuation types areaccumulated at the valuation area level.Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence.

4. Moving average price results from accumulation of stock quantity, value,and valuation price at the valuation area level.Determine whether this statement is true or false.

TrueFalse

5. The structure of a refurbishment order corresponds to the structure of amaintenance order maintenance order.Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence.

6. It is possible to post the return of a refurbished part to the warehousefor an order.Determine whether this statement is true or false.

TrueFalse



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Answers

1. Both materials with serial numbers and materials without serial numberscan be refurbished.

Answer: True

Both types of materials can be refurbished.

2. Where does the repaired/refurbished repairable spares go afterrefurbishment?

Answer: The repaired/refurbished repairable spares are returned to thewarehouse per goods receipt in accordance with the order planning. Theorder is confirmed and completed.

3. Stock quantity, stock value, and valuation price for all the valuationtypes are accumulated at the valuation area level.

Answer: Stock quantity, stock value, valuation price

4. Moving average price results from accumulation of stock quantity, value,and valuation price at the valuation area level.

Answer: True

Moving average price results from accumulation of stock quantity, value,and valuation price at the valuation area level.

5. The structure of a refurbishment order corresponds to the structure of amaintenance order.

Answer: maintenance order

6. It is possible to post the return of a refurbished part to the warehousefor an order.

Answer: True

The return of a refurbished part to the warehouse for orders can beposted.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 7Preventive Maintenance

Unit OverviewIn this unit, you will be able to describe the basics of preventive Maintenance.You will also be able to identify the functions of task lists and their role inwork scheduling. In addition, you will be able to create single cycle andstrategy plans. Finally, you will be able to generate maintenance orders frommaintenance plans.


� Define Preventive Maintenance� Identify the Preventive Maintenance process flow� Define task lists� Identify the structure of task lists� Identify a Single Cycle Plan� Identify a Time-based strategy plan� Identify the need to schedule maintenance plans� Identify a Planned Date

Unit ContentsLesson: Preventive Maintenance Process.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312Lesson: Preventive Maintenance Task Lists.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316

Exercise 18: Displaying Task Lists ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319Lesson: Preventive Maintenance Planning ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322

Exercise 19: Configuring Single-Cycle Plans and Using Task Lists ... . .331Exercise 20: Strategy Plan .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337

Lesson: Scheduling Maintenance Plans... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344Exercise 21: Maintenance Plan Scheduling ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349


I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 7: Preventive Maintenance PLM300

Lesson: Preventive Maintenance Process

Lesson OverviewThis lesson will help you understand Preventive Maintenance and identify itstypes. In addition, you will be able to describe the Preventive Maintenanceprocess flow.


� Define Preventive Maintenance� Identify the Preventive Maintenance process flow

Business ExampleIn a company, Preventive Maintenance processes include all maintenancework that can be planned with respect to the scope of the work and the datesinvolved, regular inspections, recurring maintenance tasks, and plannedrepairs. The objective of preventive maintenance tasks is to prevent thesystem and other technical objects from a breakdown. A maintenance planneris responsible for carrying out the preventive maintenance process in thecompany.

Defining Preventive Maintenance

Figure 127: Types of Preventive Maintenance



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Lesson: Preventive Maintenance Process

To keep downtime and maintenance costs to a minimum, the technicalsystems at International Demonstration and Education System (IDES) areinspected and maintained regularly. The preventive maintenance performedhere is based on time, performance, or the condition of the technical object.Preventive maintenance is divided into three areas:

Time-based: Preventive maintenance tasks are triggered after a specific periodof time has elapsed, for example, every six months.

Performance-based: Preventive maintenance tasks are due when a specificperformance level has been reached, for example, every 10,000 km.

Condition-based: Preventive maintenance tasks are due when a condition isoutside a specific value range. For example, a thread depth below 15 mm ortemperature higher than 85 C.

Different Phases of the Preventive Maintenance Process

Figure 128: Preventive Maintenance: Process

The Preventive Maintenance process pertains to work scheduling andmaintenance planning. It is divided into 5 steps.

Step 1: The task list defines object-dependent or object-independent processsteps to be performed.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Step 2: The maintenance plan is created for the object. It automaticallygenerate orders, notifications, and service entry sheets in accordance with anyspecified guidelines.

Step 3: The scheduling is responsible for the regular call up of orders,notifications, and service entry sheets, and for recalculating planned dates.

Step 4: The maintenance order is automatically generated by the maintenanceorder and entered in the order list, from where it is processed.

Step 5: The technical completion marks the order and the correspondingplanned date in the maintenance plan as finished. The date of the technicalcompletion is used in the maintenance plan to calculate the next planned date.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Lesson: Preventive Maintenance Process

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Define Preventive Maintenance� Identify the Preventive Maintenance process flow



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson: Preventive Maintenance Task Lists

Lesson OverviewThis lesson will help you to define a preventive maintenance task list. It willalso help you to identify the structure of the task list.


� Define task lists� Identify the structure of task lists

Business ExampleAmaintenance task list is the instrument for controlling the plant maintenancetask and is based on the operational plans. A maintenance planner isresponsible for creating this task list. The maintenance task list is based on themaintenance/repair task and the information concerning the execution date.This task list can be attached to the equipments and functional locations.

Defining Tasks Lists

Figure 129: Task List



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Lesson: Preventive Maintenance Task Lists

Maintenance task lists describe a series of individual maintenance activities.You can use them to standardize recurring activities, plan them moreeffectively, and to save time when creating maintenance orders andmaintenance plans.

Task lists can be object-independent, such as categories like equipment plan,plan for the functional location, and, in this case, refer to exactly one technicalobject.

Object-independent task lists, like the category of general maintenance tasklist, can be used for multiple objects of the same type.

General maintenance task lists can be used for routine and plannedmaintenance tasks. Task lists also specify which spare parts and tools arerequired for operations and the time needed to perform the work.

If you have created maintenance task lists, you can create maintenance ordersand maintenance plans, since you refer to the operations and processesalready entered in the maintenance task list. For example, if you create amaintenance order for a task, for which all the individual operations havealready been described in a maintenance task list, you only need to specifythis task list and the required times in the maintenance order. You do notneed to enter the individual operations because they are copied from themaintenance task list. If the same task is required again, you can create themaintenance order with reference to the maintenance task list.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Structuring Task Lists

Figure 130: Maintenance Task Lists: Structure

The following assignments are made in the task list header: A planner group,maintenance strategy, and a series of other parameters.

The following assignments are possible for operations: Time, components,work center, and a series of other parameters like the production resources.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 18: Displaying Task Lists

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Display task list details

Business ExampleA maintenance task list is created by a maintenance planner on the basis ofoperational plans. It is an instrument for controlling the plant maintenancetask. It can be used to store the recurring sequence of operations as a masterrecord. These operations can then be included either in a maintenance planor in order planning.

TaskTask List Group

1. What are task list groups and group counters used for?

2. Display the task list header of the general maintenance task listPUMP_WTG with group counter 1.

How do you proceed?

Which parameters indicate that this task list has been defined forstrategy-based maintenance planning? What is the value?

3. Display the operation list.

How do you proceed?

Which maintenance packages have been assigned to which operations?



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 18: Displaying Task ListsTaskTask List Group

1. What are task list groups and group counters used for?

a) The task list group combines task lists with similar topics fromlogical and data-related perspectives. The group counter is thesequence number of a task list within the task list group.

2. Display the task list header of the general maintenance task listPUMP_WTG with group counter 1.

How do you proceed?

Which parameters indicate that this task list has been defined forstrategy-based maintenance planning? What is the value?

a) Display the task list header:

SAP menu → Logistics → Plant Maintenance → PreventiveMaintenance → Work Scheduling → Task Lists → GeneralMaintenance Task Lists→ Display

Task list group: PUMP_WTG

Task list group counter: 1

�Header� The value A is entered in the �Maintenance strategy� field(calendar-based scheduling). This shows that the general task listshould be used for time-based strategic maintenance. Strategy Aprovides the maintenance packages (cycles) that are available forthe operations

3. Display the operation list.

How do you proceed?

Which maintenance packages have been assigned to which operations?

a) Display the operation list:

From the task list header, button �Operation�;

Then button �MntP� to display the maintenance packages for alloperations.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Define task lists� Identify the structure of task lists



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson: Preventive Maintenance Planning

Lesson OverviewThis lesson will help you to identify a single cycle plan and a time-basedstrategy plan.


� Identify a Single Cycle Plan� Identify a Time-based strategy plan

Business ExampleA maintenance planner does preventive maintenance planning in a company.Such planning can be time-based, performance-based, or condition-based.Being a Maintenance planner in a company, you can choose a single cycle planin which the same activity, like same inspections, must be executed at regularintervals. You can also choose a strategy plan in which maintenance work andinspections are performed in different cycles.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Lesson: Preventive Maintenance Planning

Single Cycle Plan

Figure 131: Scheduling Data and Maintenance Item

Business process: The same activity must be executed at regular intervals.For example, the annual inspection of fire extinguishers, the acceptance testevery two years, and the inspection of boilers every six years, as per pressurevessel regulations

The maintenance plan is composed of maintenance items and schedulingdates and is used to automatically generate maintenance call objects likeorder, notification and service entry sheet. The maintenance item containsthe following data:

� Planning data, such as maintenance planning plant, maintenance plannergroup, and order type

� Reference object� Task list (optional)� The scheduling data contains the following:� A cycle or maintenance intervals.� Scheduling parameters for fine-tuning scheduling.� A list of planned and call dates.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


A maintenance plan can have one or more maintenance items. For example,pump maintenance has one maintenance item for the pump transmissionwith corresponding task list and one maintenance item for the pump motorwith corresponding task list.

Figure 132: Using a Task List to Include an Operation List

A task list is assigned within the maintenance item.

The operations are executed at the times calculated by the system whenscheduling the maintenance plan.

In the case of a single cycle plan, the complete task list is always due.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Time-Based Strategy Plan

Figure 133: Strategy Plan: Business Process

Business process: Maintenance work and inspections are performed indifferent cycles.

Example: Service record for a fleet object (excerpt)

� Check fan belt: every 12 months� Change fan belt: every 24 months� Change oil: every 6 months� Change oil filter: every 12 months� Check air filter: every 12 months� Change air filter: every 24 months



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 134: Maintenance strategy

Business process: Maintenance work and inspections are performed indifferent cycles.

Example: Service record for a fleet object (excerpt)

� Check fan belt every 12 months� Change fan belt every 24 months� Change oil every 6 months� Change oil filter every 12 months� Check air filter every 12 months� Change air filter every 24 months

The maintenance strategy consists of several maintenance packages andrepresents the scheduling rule for preventive maintenance. You can assigntask lists to maintenance strategies.

The scheduling indicator determines the scheduling type.

Examples:

� Time-based� Time-based using key date� Time-based according to factory calendar� Performance-based



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


You can assign maintenance packages to a maintenance strategy. Thepackages for a strategy can have different cycle units, such as month, year, butthey must always have the same dimension, like time.

Figure 135: Maintenance Package

Maintenance packages define the frequency at which specific operations areexecuted. You can assign them to the operations in a task list. These packagesare part of a maintenance strategy.

The important parameters for a maintenance package are:

� Package number� Description� Cycle length� Unit of measurement� Hierarchy

If two packages are due on the same date, the hierarchy determineswhich package is performed first.

� Offset

The offset determines the first due date for a package.

� Preliminary / follow-up buffer

The preliminary or follow-up buffer specifies the tolerance over whichthe intended start and end dates for a package can range.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 136: Task List and Maintenance Strategy

Task lists can be created for use in preventive maintenance. To prepare tasklists for use in strategy plans, the following steps are required:

A strategy is defined in the task list header.

Packages can then be assigned to different operations in the task list. Thisdefines the frequency with which the operations should be executed.

Figure 137: Creating a Time-Based Strategy Plan



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


You can assign a maintenance strategy to a strategy-based maintenance plan.

Only a task list that has the same maintenance strategy as the maintenanceplan can be assigned to a strategy-based maintenance plan.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 19: Configuring Single-Cycle Plansand Using Task Lists

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Configure a single cycle plan� Use a pre-defined task list

Business ExamplePreventive maintenance planning in a company is done by a maintenanceplanner and it can be time-based, performance-based, or condition-based. Themaintenance planner can choose a single cycle plan to display similar tasksthat are due at the same interval or he can also choose a strategy plan in whichmaintenance work and inspections are performed in different cycles.

Task 1Creating a Single Cycle Plan

A mechanical inspection should be performed every three months for a pieceof equipment TEQ-##. When this inspection takes place, all operations inthe general maintenance task list PUMP_REP with group counter 2 shouldbe executed.

1. Which menu path do you use?

Use maintenance plan type Plant Maintenance.

2. After you have entered your equipment number, the system displaysvarious default values.

Which default values are shown? Where do they come from?



Order type

Maintenance activity type




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Main work center

Business area

Task 2Task list

1. What options do you have for defining operations in the maintenanceplan?

2. Include the task list in your maintenance plan.

How do you proceed?

Hint: When you save the maintenance plan, the current date isproposed as the start date. Confirm this start date and copy it tothe maintenance plan.

Save your maintenance plan. Which number is assigned to it?



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 19: Configuring Single-Cycle Plansand Using Task ListsTask 1Creating a Single Cycle Plan

A mechanical inspection should be performed every three months for a pieceof equipment TEQ-##. When this inspection takes place, all operations inthe general maintenance task list PUMP_REP with group counter 2 shouldbe executed.

1. Which menu path do you use?

Use maintenance plan type Plant Maintenance.

a) SAP menu→ Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→ Preventive Maintenance→Maintenance Planning→Maintenance Plans→ Create→ SingleCycle Plan


Maintenance plan number Do not specify (internal numberassignment)

Maintenance plan category Maintenance plan order

Short text/description Enter as required

Cycle 3 MON

Equipment TEQ-##

2. After you have entered your equipment number, the system displaysvarious default values.

Which default values are shown? Where do they come from?



Order type

Maintenance activity type




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Main work center

Business area

a) Default Values

Field name or data type Values Origin

Maintenance planning plant 1000 Equipment

Maintenance planner group I## Equipment

Order type PM02 Customizing

Maintenance activity type 102 Customizing

Main work center T-ME## Equipment

Business area 1000 Equipment

Task 2Task list

1. What options do you have for defining operations in the maintenanceplan?

a)

1. Button "Select task list" (binoculars) and set a selectioncondition.

2. Use button "Create task list" (white sheet of paper) to create anew general task list.

3. Do not specify a task list; a standard operation (short order)is then generated in the subsequent maintenance order usingthe short text from the maintenance item.

2. Include the task list in your maintenance plan.

How do you proceed?

Hint: When you save the maintenance plan, the current date isproposed as the start date. Confirm this start date and copy it tothe maintenance plan.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y



a)

� Binoculars button (select task list)� Activate task list category for General task list.� For example, enter Pump* as a selection criterion in the �Task

list group� field.� Make a selection and choose the required general task list from

the following list (task list type A, task list group PUMP_REP,task list group counter 2).

b) The number assigned is 60.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 20: Strategy Plan

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Display a maintenance strategy� Configure a strategy plan� Use a pre-defined task list

Business ExampleIf different tasks are due according to different cycles, this can be representedusing a strategy-based maintenance plan.

Task 1Displaying a Maintenance Strategy

1. Display the maintenance strategy A and determine the following data:

From Detail View the strategy:

Maintenance strategy header

Scheduling indicator

Strategy unit

Valid from delayed finish

Valid from early finish

From the Package view the strategy:

Maintenancepackages

Short text Cyclelength

Unit Hierarchy




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Task 2Creating a Strategy Plan

Preventive electrical maintenance tasks are to be performed at your piece ofequipment TEQ-##. However, the tasks have different cycles.

1. Create a strategy plan with maintenance plan type Maintenance PlanOrder for maintenance strategy A for your piece of equipment TEQ-##.

How do you proceed?

2. Include the general maintenance task list PUMP_WTG with groupcounter 2 in the strategy plan. Which maintenance packages are used?

3. Determine the maintenance cycles in which the individual operations aredue. How do you proceed?

Operation Maintenance package(s)




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 20: Strategy PlanTask 1Displaying a Maintenance Strategy

1. Display the maintenance strategy A and determine the following data:

From Detail View the strategy:


Scheduling indicator

Strategy unit

Valid from delayed finish

Valid from early finish

From the Package view the strategy:

Maintenancepackages

Short text Cyclelength

Unit Hierarchy




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


a) Maintenance strategy

SAP menu→ Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→ Preventive Maintenance→Maintenance Planning→Maintenance Strategies ###Display



Scheduling indicator Time

Strategy unit MON

Shift factor for late completion 100%

Shift factor for early completion 100%

Mainte-nance Pack-ages

Shorttext

Descrip-tion

Cycledura-tion

Unit Hierarchy

1 1M Monthly 1 MON 1

2 3M 3 monthly 3 MON 1

3 1Y Yearly 12 MON 2

Task 2Creating a Strategy Plan

Preventive electrical maintenance tasks are to be performed at your piece ofequipment TEQ-##. However, the tasks have different cycles.

1. Create a strategy plan with maintenance plan type Maintenance PlanOrder for maintenance strategy A for your piece of equipment TEQ-##.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


How do you proceed?

a) SAP menu→ Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→ Preventive Maintenance→Maintenance Planning→Maintenance Plans→ Create ###StrategyPlan


Maintenance plan number Do not specify (internal numberassignment)

Maintenance plan category Maintenance plan order

Maintenance strategy A

Short text/description Enter as required

Equipment TEQ-##

2. Include the general maintenance task list PUMP_WTG with groupcounter 2 in the strategy plan. Which maintenance packages are used?

a) Including a General Task List:

- Binoculars button (select general task list)

- The strategy (here: A) is also now used automatically as a selectionparameter, that is, only general task lists with this maintenancestrategy are selected

- Make selection as in section 2-2-2

- Maintenance packages used:

1M, 3M and 1Y

3. Determine the maintenance cycles in which the individual operations aredue. How do you proceed?





I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y



a) Maintenance packages in task list:

Button "Display task list"

In the operation overview, button "MntP" (you do not need to selectthe operations).


0010 1M, 1Y

0020 1M, 1Y

0030 1M, 1Y

0040 1M, 1Y

0050 3M, 1Y

0060 1M, 3Y



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Identify a Single Cycle Plan� Identify a Time-based strategy plan



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson: Scheduling Maintenance Plans

Lesson OverviewThis lesson will help you identify the need for scheduling the maintenanceplans. It will also help you understand the association of a cycle start datewith a planned date.


� Identify the need to schedule maintenance plans� Identify a Planned Date

Business ExampleA maintenance planner in a company has to schedule the maintenance plan.When doing this for the first time, the maintenance planner has to enter thestart date or start counter reading and specify the maintenance cycle on thetime axis. Scheduling of maintenance plans ensures the periodicity of themaintenance activity.

Maintenance Plans

Figure 138: Schedule Maintenance Plans



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Lesson: Scheduling Maintenance Plans

Scheduling allows you to define start dates for maintenance orders and keepthem updated. Without regular scheduling, call objects, such as maintenanceorders, notifications, and service entry sheets, cannot be created. Schedulingis normally performed automatically at regular intervals, such as dailyor weekly, in a background job. Restart: The normal function to start amaintenance plan for a technical object that has just been brought into servicefor which inspection activities need to begin.

Scheduling is the function that calls up the next maintenance order afterthe previous one has been completed. It is not usually performed manually,but triggered by the technical completion of the order and the deadlinemonitoring program.

Start in current cycle: You can restart scheduling for your strategy plan inthe current cycle. This function is useful if you have previously been usinga different EDP-system to SAP, or no EDP-system at all, to manage yourmaintenance work.

For example, if the maintenance strategy that you have assigned to yourmaintenance plan, has three packages, monthly, every four months, and everysix months, then instead of starting scheduling with the package monthly,you can decide to start with the six-monthly package. You must then enterthe date when the last preventive maintenance work, in this case, the fifthmonthly package, was performed.

Manual call: If you also want to schedule a maintenance task for a particulardate, you can schedule this date manually.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 139: Cycle Start and Planned Date

When you create a single cycle plan, the cycle is assigned the period untileach planned date, i.e., the due date of the task. Orders are generated basedon the planned date.

The call date, i.e. the date the order was created on, is usually before theplanned date so that there is a certain pre-processing phase such as formaterial procurement.

The cycle start defines the date from which the calculation of the planneddates should begin.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 140: Maintenance Scheduling Overview

Maintenance dates can be displayed by a graphic schedule overview or aschedule list.

The graphic schedule overview uses colored symbols to display upcomingor completed tasks and has a variety of processing functions, such asmaintenance plan simulation and capacity planning.

You can use the scheduling list to display all the maintenance dates forthe conditions you have defined, such as for a piece of equipment or amaintenance plan. The ABAP List Viewer allows you to define user-specificdisplay variants.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 21: Maintenance Plan Scheduling

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Restart a maintenance plan� Initiate a maintenance plan in the cycle� Display the scheduling overview� Display your maintenance orders

Business ExampleUsing maintenance plan scheduling, maintenance dates due regularly in themaintenance plans are converted into maintenance orders, and dates that areon hold are recalculated if the scheduling parameters are changed.

Task 1Restarting a Single Cycle Plan

1. Start your single cycle plan for the 1st of the current month.

Which is the first due date?

Save the maintenance plan.

Task 2Starting a Strategy Plan in the Current Cycle

1. Start your strategy plan so that the first 3-month package was performedon the 28th of the previous month.


Which is the next due date? Which package is due then?


Task 3Displaying Maintenance Orders

1. How do you find the maintenance orders you have generated?

Which order numbers have been generated?Continued on next page



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Task 4Scheduling Overview

1. Display an overview of the due maintenance dates in list form for yourmaintenance plans.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 21: Maintenance Plan SchedulingTask 1Restarting a Single Cycle Plan

1. Start your single cycle plan for the 1st of the current month.

Which is the first due date?


a) Restarting a Single Cycle Plan

SAP menu → Logistics → Plant Maintenance → PreventiveMaintenance → Maintenance Planning → Scheduling forMaintenance Plans→ Schedule

Edit→Start

If a start date was transferred to the maintenance plan when thestrategy plan was created, this is now proposed (here: the 1st ofthe current month);

If no start date has yet been entered in the maintenance plan, onemust now be set (for example, current date).

Hint: The start and ongoing scheduling of all maintenanceplans is not usually executed manually, but using deadlinemonitoring which is controlled by a system job.

Task 2Starting a Strategy Plan in the Current Cycle

1. Start your strategy plan so that the first 3-month package was performedon the 28th of the previous month.


Which is the next due date? Which package is due then?




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y



a) Starting a Strategy Plan in the Current Cycle

SAP menu → Logistics → Plant Maintenance → PreventiveMaintenance → Maintenance Planning → Scheduling forMaintenance Plans→ Schedule

� Button "Start in cycle"� Confirmation date, for example, 28th of the previous month,

then button �Select package�� Cursor on first package "3M", button "Start offset" and back� The next due planned date is displayed in the list of scheduled

calls according to the entry� Due packages: 1M

Task 3Displaying Maintenance Orders

1. How do you find the maintenance orders you have generated?




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Which order numbers have been generated?

a) Displaying Maintenance Orders

1. Using list editing for orders:

SAP menu→ Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→ MaintenanceProcessing→ Order→ Order List→ Change

Order type PM02.

2. Maintenance plan scheduling:

SAP menu → Logistic → Plant Maintenance → PreventiveMaintenance → Maintenance Planning → Scheduling forMaintenance Plans→ Schedule

� �Scheduled calls� tab page� Select a line with the status �Called�� Symbol �Display orders �(glasses)

3. Displaying/Changing a Maintenance Plan

SAP menu→ Logistics → Plant Maintenance → PreventiveMaintenance→Maintenance Planning→Maintenance Plans→Display/Change

� �Scheduled calls� tab page� Select a line with the status �Called�� Symbol �Display orders �(glasses)

Order numbers:

9020xx

Task 4Scheduling Overview

1. Display an overview of the due maintenance dates in list form for yourmaintenance plans.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y



a) SAP menu → Logistics → Plant Maintenance → PreventiveMaintenance → Maintenance Planning → Scheduling forMaintenance Plans→ Scheduling Overview→ List

� Enter maintenance plan numbers� Execute

Hint: Additional fields can be shown analogous to thenotification and order lists using

Settings→ Display variants→ Current.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Identify the need to schedule maintenance plans� Identify a Planned Date



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit Summary PLM300

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Define Preventive Maintenance� Identify the Preventive Maintenance process flow� Define task lists� Identify the structure of task lists� Identify a Single Cycle Plan� Identify a Time-based strategy plan� Identify the need to schedule maintenance plans� Identify a Planned Date



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Test Your Knowledge

1. PreventiveMaintenance is based on time time, performance performance,and condition condition of the technical object.Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence.

2. Time-based Preventive Maintenance plans are triggered after a specificperiod of time has elapsed.Determine whether this statement is true or false.

TrueFalse

3. What are the possible assignments for operations?

4. Maintenance Task Lists can be used to standardize recurring activities.Determine whether this statement is true or false.

TrueFalse

5. The packages for a strategy can have different cycle units, such as month,year, but they must always have the same dimension, such as time.Determine whether this statement is true or false.

TrueFalse

6. Maintenance item consists of planning data, reference object, and tasklists.Determine whether this statement is true or false.

TrueFalse



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


7. Planned dates define the date from which the calculation of the cyclestart date begins.Determine whether this statement is true or false.

TrueFalse

8. Scheduling Scheduling allows you to define start dates for maintenanceorders.Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Answers

1. Preventive Maintenance is based on time, performance, and condition ofthe technical object.

Answer: time, performance, condition

2. Time-based Preventive Maintenance plans are triggered after a specificperiod of time has elapsed.

Answer: True

Time-based Preventive Maintenance plans are triggered after a specificperiod of time has elapsed.

3. What are the possible assignments for operations?

Answer: Time, components, work center, and a series of other parameterslike the production resources.

4. Maintenance Task Lists can be used to standardize recurring activities.

Answer: True

Maintenance Task Lists can be used to standardize recurring activities.

5. The packages for a strategy can have different cycle units, such as month,year, but they must always have the same dimension, such as time.

Answer: True

The packages for a strategy can have different cycle units, for example,month, year, but they must always have the same dimension, such astime.

6. Maintenance item consists of planning data, reference object, and tasklists.

Answer: True

Maintenance item consists of planning data, reference object, and tasklists.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


7. Planned dates define the date from which the calculation of the cyclestart date begins.

Answer: True

Planned dates define the date from which the calculation of the cyclestart date begins.

8. Scheduling allows you to define start dates for maintenance orders.

Answer: Scheduling



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 8Project-Oriented Maintenance

Unit OverviewAfter completing this unit, you will be able to describe the potentialapplications of project-oriented maintenance. You will also identify thestructure of a maintenance project.


� Define Projects� Explain the Project-Oriented Maintenance process flow� Identify maintenance project structure and the scope of an SAP Project

Enterprise

Unit ContentsLesson: Project-Oriented Maintenance Process .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362


I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 8: Project-Oriented Maintenance PLM300

Lesson: Project-Oriented Maintenance Process

Lesson OverviewIn this lesson, you will understand the characteristics of a project. You willalso learn about the Project-Oriented Maintenance process flow. In addition,you will identify the factors resulting in a Shutdown Project. Finally, you willunderstand the applicability of the SAP Project Enterprise.


� Define Projects� Explain the Project-Oriented Maintenance process flow� Identify maintenance project structure and the scope of an SAP Project

Enterprise

Business ExampleMaintenance projects of a company are generally integrated in the internalprocesses. To carry out an entire project, you need to describe the aims ofthe project in detail and structure the project task to be performed. Theproject related maintenance tasks that have been performed are settled tothe subprojects. The incurred costs of the orders are forwarded to the WorkBreakdown Structure (WBS) element. The budget and the dates are plannedand monitored at the level of the WBS element. Scheduling and resourceplanning are done at the particular maintenance order level.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Lesson: Project-Oriented Maintenance Process

Defining Projects

Figure 141: What is a Project?

Projects are tasks with particular characteristics:

� They are usually complex, unique, and can contain a high level of risk.� They focus on precise objectives that were agreed between the sold-to

party and the contractor.� They are fixed in time and are cost and capacity intensive.� They involve several departments that contribute to the project

development.� They are subject to certain quality requirements.� They are often of strategic importance to the company responsible for

them.

Projects are usually integrated into the business flow of a company. To controlall the tasks that arise when realizing a project, you need a project-specificorganization that should reside between the two departments involved.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 142: Conditions for the Project Work

Projects are often subject to conflicts between varying requirements andrestrictions. For example, only limited resources are available, or there is apreset cost limit. Projects also pose a high risk for a company, because costsare often high and there is no guarantee that the projects will be completed.

Figure 143: Use of the Project System



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


The project system, i.e., SAP PS component - part of the mySAP ProductLifecycle Management solution can be used in various areas. Some typicalareas where it is implemented are:

� Investment projects in Marketing� Make-to-order projects in contractor and engineering companies� IT projects in Research and Development� Projects in the utilities industry� Maintenance projects� Shutdown projects represent special types of maintenance projects

Project-Oriented Maintenance Process Flow

Figure 144: Project-Oriented Maintenance: Process

In a company, inspections and repair work requiring a shutdown of the entireasset is performed at regular intervals. These tasks should be planned andmonitored in the form of projects. Investment measures should also berepresented in the same way.

The following steps are involved in the process of Project-OrientedMaintenance:



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Step 1: A project definition and a work breakdown structure composed ofWork Breakdown Structure (WBS) elements, are created for the project tobe executed.

Step 2: To structure the WBS elements, maintenance orders are created andmanually or automatically assigned to the WBS elements. This means that theorder planning data, for example, planned costs can be condensed to the WBSelements even for the overall project planning, such as assigning a budget onthe basis of the total planned costs.

For scheduling purposes, maintenance orders can also be assigned assubnetworks of networks. The networks are, in turn, assigned to the WBSelement.

Step 3: The orders are performed within the framework of the projectspecifications (for example, cross-checking the planned and actual costs of anorder against the budget of the WBS element).

Step 4: When the order is being performed, you can monitor the currentsituation, such as adherence to schedule, consumption of budget, etc. usingthe reports from the project information systems.

Step 5: After the tasks are complete, the orders receive their time confirmationsand are completed technically and, if necessary, settled to the WBS element.

Step 6: The central key figures, such as overall costs, materials consumed, andtimes, can also be evaluated using the reports from the project informationsystem.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Maintenance Project Structure

Figure 145: Structure of a Maintenance Project

A project is a plan with a fixed theme and time, which is executed on across-departmental level, represents an innovation and carries a certain risk.You can use projects to plan, control, monitor, and evaluate comprehensiveplans. The functions range from the logistics area involving scheduling,materials and work centers to the accounting area containing budgeting,assigning cost centers and updating G/L accounts.

In the Plant Maintenance area, this plan usually has the following form:

Shutdowns, overhauls, modifications, major repairs, and investments.

Projects are set out by a project definition and aWork Breakdown Structure(WBS). The individual sub-steps are depicted asWBS elements. Maintenanceorders can be manually or automatically assigned to each WBS element. TheWBS element then controls the orders with regard to the basic dates and thebudget.

The project-oriented maintenance is based on the combined use of the twoPLM application components: Program and Project Management and AssetLifecycle Management.

There is also an interface to the external project planning software Primavera,which can also be used together with Asset Lifecycle Management forproject-oriented maintenance.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 146: Shutdown Project

You can use Project Management to map a Shutdown Project. The lifecycleof a project is composed of the following phases:

� Rough and detailed planning Project execution� Project control� Completion

The main goal is to ensure that working conditions are safe, alongsidereducing time and cost expenditure. A shutdown is indicated by the followingcharacteristics:

� Shutdown means a significant production outage for the plant.� The main part of a plant�s maintenance costs are incurred during a

shutdown.� The production losses during a shutdown are the most significant losses

during the plant�s production plans.� Shutdown tasks must be inspected, monitored, and documented.

The result of this: Increased resources for planning, preparing, and performinga shutdown.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Define Projects� Explain the Project-Oriented Maintenance process flow� Identify maintenance project structure and the scope of an SAP Project

Enterprise



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit Summary PLM300

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Define Projects� Explain the Project-Oriented Maintenance process flow� Identify maintenance project structure and the scope of an SAP Project

Enterprise



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Test Your Knowledge

1. List any three areas where the SAP Project System can be implemented.

2. Projects are often subject to conflicts between varying requirements andrestrictions.Determine whether this statement is true or false.

TrueFalse

3. Shutdown means a significant production outage for the plant.Determine whether this statement is true or false.

TrueFalse



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Answers

1. List any three areas where the SAP Project System can be implemented.

Answer: Projects in the utilities industry, maintenance projects, andinvestment projects in marketing are areas where the SAP Project Systemcan be implemented.

2. Projects are often subject to conflicts between varying requirements andrestrictions.

Answer: True

Projects are often subject to conflicts between varying requirements andrestrictions.

3. Shutdown means a significant production outage for the plant.

Answer: True

Shutdown means a significant production outage for the plant.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 9Work Clearance Management

Unit OverviewIn this unit, you will be able to explain the Work Clearance Managementconcept and describe how WCM is integrated with Plant Maintenance.


� Define Work Clearance Management� Identify the link between WCM and the plant maintenance process

Unit ContentsLesson: Explaining Work Clearance Management .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374


I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 9: Work Clearance Management PLM300

Lesson: Explaining Work Clearance Management

Lesson OverviewThis lesson will help you define Work Clearance Management (WCM). Youwill also be able to identify the Work Clearance Document.


� Define Work Clearance Management� Identify the link between WCM and the plant maintenance process

Business ExampleWork Clearance Management is the process by which a company�s technicalsystem can be isolated to create safe conditions for carrying out maintenancetasks, preventive maintenance, and inspection work. WCM puts an emphasison the tagout/lockout processes.

WCM and Plant Maintenance

� Maintenance crews work in a hazardous environment that can includehigh voltage and radiation exposure.

� They need to perform maintenance measures when the systems areoperational.

� The operation of a technical system must not be affected under anycircumstances.

� Work-related illnesses require special health and safety measures.

At IDES, a well-defined process must ensure work safety before anymaintenance measures are carried out.

This process must be easily understandable and available at all times toemployees involved in the maintenance process.

Work Clearance Management makes this possible.

Inspections, repairs, or maintenance work for a technical object might only becarried out when the measures to ensure work safety have been implemented.These safety measures include, for example, lockout/tagout, fire protection,radiation protection.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Lesson: Explaining Work Clearance Management

Work Clearance Management (PM-WCM) enables you to control and monitorthese activities. This means you are able to ensure safe and secure workingconditions for maintenance employees, observe environmental regulations,and guarantee technical system availability.

Figure 147: WCM and the Maintenance Process

Orders are linked to WCM at the order header level.

You cannot perform the maintenance tasks forWCM-relevant orders untilyou have released these orders with status �Released for Execution� (EXEC).Setting the tasks to �released� depends on the WCM architecture and whetherthe valuation was activated.

Connecting orders to WCM is not absolutely necessary. Work clearancemanagement enables you to carry out safety measures without orders. Forexample, if it is compulsory to document every change within the asset, youdo not require the order for planning or collecting costs.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Process Flow of WCM

Figure 148: Work Clearance Management: Process (1)

Example: A leakage in a feed-water pump at the biological purificationpumping plant must be dealt with. The pumpmust be opened. Amaintenanceorder with WCM could contain the following steps:

Step 1: The maintenance planner creates a maintenance order.

Step 2: By creating a work clearance application for the order, the maintenanceplanner requests tagout/lockout for the pump. In other words, the pumpmust be isolated so that work can be carried out safely.

Step 3: In the work clearance document, the work clearance planner (safetyengineer) records valves 1 and 2 located in the pipe in front of and behind thepump as having the tagging condition closed.

Step 4: The work clearance planner (safety engineer) approves the tagging.

Step 5: The tagging is performed on-site and valves 1 and 2 are closed andare given tags.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 149: Work Clearance Management: Process (2)

Step 6: After tagging has been performed, the maintenance planner canrelease the order from a safety perspective. Business order release takes placeindependent of this.

Step 7: After the work has been carried out and tagout/lockout is no longerrequired, the maintenance planner sets the statusWork complete for the order.Technical completion is independent of this.

Step 8: The work clearance application is completed and untagging approved.

Step 9: Untagging is carried out on-site and valves 1 and 2 are reopened andtheir tags removed.

Step 10: The maintenance planner technically completes the order.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 150: Work Clearance Document

The work clearance document contains a detailed description oflockout/tagout.

The work clearance document is the only WCM object that also has itemsapart from the header data. The items specify all the technical objects that areto be processed in connection with a lockout/tagout. The WCD might includeequipment, functional locations, technical objects that are not managed in theR/3 structure and comments.

The work clearance document has a header similar to every WCM object. Italso has the following screens:

Maintenance screen

Switching screen (not for WCD templates)



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Define Work Clearance Management� Identify the link between WCM and the plant maintenance process



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit Summary PLM300

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Define Work Clearance Management� Identify the link between WCM and the plant maintenance process



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Test Your Knowledge

1. What is the basis for performing maintenance task for WCM relevantorders?

2. What defines the process, makes it easily understandable and availableat all times to the employees involved in Maintenance Process?



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Answers

1. What is the basis for performing maintenance task for WCM relevantorders?

Answer: For WCM relevant orders, the maintenance tasks cannot beperformed until these tasks have been released (status �Released forExecution �(EXEC)). Setting the tasks to �released� depends on the WCMarchitecture and whether the valuation was activated.

2. What defines the process, makes it easily understandable and availableat all times to the employees involved in Maintenance Process?

Answer: Work Clearance Management



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 10Reports and Analysis

Unit OverviewIn this unit, you will be able to identify the sections of the maintenance history.You will also check the usage list for a piece of equipment. In addition, youwill be able to perform standard analyses. Finally, you will learn how to givean overview on analyses.


� Define Evaluation steps� Explain Usage Lists� Explain Logistics Information System (LIS)� Specify the scope of standard analysis and reports� Define Business Information Warehouse Architecture (BW)� Explain Business Content Asset Lifecycle Management (ALM)

Unit ContentsLesson: Maintenance History .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384Lesson: Evaluations based on Logistics Information System.... . . . . . . . . . . . . .389

Exercise 22: Evaluations and Analyses .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395Lesson: Evaluations based on Business Information Warehouse.. .. . . . . . . . .400


I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit 10: Reports and Analysis PLM300

Lesson: Maintenance History

Lesson OverviewIn this lesson, you will learn about the evaluation steps used for analyzingPlant Maintenance. You will also understand the scope of Usage Lists andidentify the use of material usage lists. In addition, you will learn about thetools involved in analyzing maintenance history.


� Define Evaluation steps� Explain Usage Lists

Business ExampleIn a company, archiving of completed orders can be done periodically, sayonce in six months. Then these archived formats can be transferred to themaintenance order history for long time analysis. These historical orders cancontain important data in condensed form.

Identifying Maintenance History

Figure 151: Evaluations: Steps



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Lesson: Maintenance History

Evaluations of technical and cost-oriented details should be object-related orarea-based.

Online updating of data guarantees quick, optimized access to the requiredcharacteristics and key figures.

System-wide analyses are performed with the Business InformationWarehouse (BW).

The following steps are involved in Evaluations:

Step 1: Master data and movement data are created.

Step 2: The maintenance manager performs cost-based and technicalevaluations using pre-defined standard analyses or user-defined flexibleanalyses in the Plant Maintenance Information System (PMIS), which is a partof the LIS (Logistics Information System in R/3).

Alternatively, the maintenance manager can also use the BW to performsystem-wide evaluations. BW is an R/3 independent system that can compiledata from diverse source systems for evaluations.

Figure 152: Usage List

A Usage List provides both object-related and location-based informationabout the usage of equipment.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


It displays the phases during which the equipment was installed at afunctional location, assigned directly to a usage site such as a cost center, orstored in a warehouse.

In addition, the Usage List displays all the pieces of equipment that havebeen installed in chronological order.

Figure 153: Maintenance History

Analyses in maintenance processing are based on completed notifications ororders and historical orders.

Completed notifications and orders: You can use completed notificationsand orders for medium-term evaluations. When complete, a notification istransferred to the notification history whereas an order is transferred to thesection for completed orders. The data for completed notifications and orderscan be analyzed in full.

Evaluations can be performed in the corresponding list editing function,where the status Completed must be set each time.

Historical orders are generated when completed orders are archived andthey form the basis for long-term analyses. They are transferred to the orderhistory. Historical orders contain the most important order data in condensedform. You can perform analyses in the list editing function for the orders,where the status Historical must be set.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Lesson: Maintenance History

Figure 154: Material Usage

You can use the �Material where-used list� function to verify the use ofmaterials in maintenance orders within a specific period of time.

Orders can be chosen according to various selection criteria, such as by ordernumber, order type, and equipment.

The material where-used list also indicates the materials that were plannedwithdrawals (with reference to a reservation) and those which wereunplanned (without reference to a reservation).



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Define Evaluation steps� Explain Usage Lists



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Lesson: Evaluations based on Logistics Information System

Lesson: Evaluations based on Logistics InformationSystem

Lesson OverviewIn this lesson, you will identify the analysis techniques involved in theLogistics Information system (LIS). You will also learn how to organize theinformation structures in LIS. Next, you will understand the scope of StandardAnalysis options. Finally, you will learn how to use Standard Report inControlling.


� Explain Logistics Information System (LIS)� Specify the scope of standard analysis and reports

Business ExampleA company can do standard analysis of its maintenance function usingLogistics Information System (LIS). The maintenance information uses keyfigures to deduct and analyze the existing problem areas. In the LIS, acompany can collect, summarize, and evaluate from the plant maintenanceobligation. The standard analysis is based on the statistics file of the LIS. Acompany can specify the periodicity of updating as day wise, week wise, ormonth wise posting period.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Logistics Information System

Figure 155: Data Flow in LIS

The Logistics Information Systems (LIS) have a modular structure andhave a number of different analysis techniques. The Plant MaintenanceInformation System (PMIS) is part of the LIS.

The maintenance application data is updated online to the PMIS during itscreation. The aim of the update is to condense the amount of data generatedin the application into informative, meaningful characteristics and key figures.

This concentration of the application data takes place in the informationstructures (info structures).

Various analyses can be based on the info structures. There is a variety ofstandard analyses, such as location analysis, damage analysis, cost analysis,and so on, which are also based on the info structures delivered in thestandard system.

You also have the option of creating your own info structures and your ownanalyses (flexible analyses).



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 156: Information Structures in Logistics

The PMIS contains the following standard information structures:

� S061 = Location and Planning

� S062 = Object Class and Manufacturer

� S063 = Damage Analysis

� S065 = Object Statistics

� S115 = Cost Evaluation

� S116 = Customer analysis

You can use the relevant standard analyses to evaluate data, without havingto make additional settings in Customizing.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 157: Organization of Information Structures

Information structures are special statistical tables that contain basic datafrom different applications. This data is constantly collected and updated bythe system.

Information structures contain three basic elements:

Characteristics are criteria that you specify to collect information abouta particular subject. For example, in Controlling, you normally requireinformation about workshops and materials.

A period unit , periodicity, makes the time reference. Dates are set withreference to this unit, that is, year, month, week, day.

Key figures are measurements of performance that provide importantbusiness information about a characteristic.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Analysis and Reports

Figure 158: Standard Analysis Options

Standard analyses provide many functions that enable you to find specificinformation for detailed evaluations.

The information structures provide the database for standard analyses.

You can specify the range of data to be evaluated. In addition, you can alsodefine the key figures or choose them online during the analysis itself

The drill-down function allows you to vary the detail of information. You canspecify the sequence in which levels of information are displayed or you canfollow the standard drill-down sequence.

Different functions are available at each level, for example, cumulativefrequency curves, ABC analyses, correlation, classification, dual classification,and ranking lists.

All the results can also be displayed graphically.

You can save the data selected for standard analysis as a selection version.Such versions also enable you to define the way you view the data.

You can select data in the background at any time. Also, you can accesssummary information in the information structure and branch to display themaster and movement data.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 159: Standard Report in CO

Data that has been accrued and collected in Plant Maintenance, for example, inmaintenance orders, can also be analyzed from a cost accounting perspectivein Controlling (CO). For example, a CO report on planned/actual variancescan be used to analyze maintenance orders.

You can still use line item reports for orders or cost centers for evaluationpurposes.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Exercise 22: Evaluations and Analyses

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� List the different parts of the maintenance history� Perform standard analyses

Business ExampleLogistics Information System (LIS) can be used for doing the standard analysisof a company�s maintenance function. The maintenance information useskey figures to deduct and analyze the existing problem areas. In the LIS, acompany can perform evaluations and analyses of costs, damage, usage times,etc. from the plant maintenance obligation.

Task 11. What are the components of the maintenance history?

Task 21. Your pump P-1000-N001 often breaks down. You want to check where

this pump has been installed to draw possible conclusions about thefrequency of damage.

How can you display a list of installation locations for P-1000-N001?

Task 31. What are the central modules for evaluations and analyses in the Plant

Maintenance Information System?

How are these structured?

Task 41. What is a standard analysis?

Which standard analyses are available in the Plant MaintenanceInformation System?




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Task 51. Perform a location analysis for the current fiscal year for the maintenance

plant 1000.

Which piece of equipment involved the greatest overall costs?



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Solution 22: Evaluations and AnalysesTask 11. What are the components of the maintenance history?

a) The components of the maintenance history are:

- Completed notifications

- Completed and historical orders

- Usage lists

Task 21. Your pump P-1000-N001 often breaks down. You want to check where

this pump has been installed to draw possible conclusions about thefrequency of damage.

How can you display a list of installation locations for P-1000-N001?

a) SAP menu→Logistics→Plant Maintenance→Management of TechnicalObjects→Equipment→ Change

Extras→Usage list

The list of equipment usage periods is displayed.

Task 31. What are the central modules for evaluations and analyses in the Plant

Maintenance Information System?

How are these structured?

a) The central modules for evaluations and analyses are the PlantMaintenance information structures.

Information structures form the basis for standard analyses andanalyses created by the user.

They contain a combination of characteristics (for example,maintenance planning plant, equipment) and key figures (forexample, number of orders, total actual costs) with time base.

In the standard system, the information structures S061, S062, S063,S065, S115 and S116 are available.




I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Task 41. What is a standard analysis?

Which standard analyses are available in the Plant MaintenanceInformation System?

a) Standard analyses are complete, pre-defined analyses that stop atone of the standard information structures.

The following standard analyses are available in the standardsystem:


Standard analyses Object Class

Manufacturer

Location

Planner Group

Damage Analysis

Object Statistics

Breakdown Analysis

Cost Analysis

Vehicle Consumption Analysis

Task 51. Perform a location analysis for the current fiscal year for the maintenance

plant 1000.

Which piece of equipment involved the greatest overall costs?

a) SAP menu→ Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→ Information System→ Standard Analyses→ Location

Enter maintenance plant 1000

Enter analysis period (=current fiscal year)

Execute

Press �Switch drilldown� button, activate equipment

Select Total Act.Costs column and press button Sort ascending



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Explain Logistics Information System (LIS)� Specify the scope of standard analysis and reports



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Lesson: Evaluations based on Business InformationWarehouse

Lesson OverviewThis lesson explains the architecture of a Business Information Warehouse. Italso provides information on the Asset Lifecycle Management.


� Define Business Information Warehouse Architecture (BW)� Explain Business Content Asset Lifecycle Management (ALM)

Business ExampleRequired report information can be retrieved through the info cubes made inthe BW.

BW Architecture

Figure 160: Business Information Warehouse (BW): Architecture



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Lesson: Evaluations based on Business Information Warehouse

The Business Information Warehouse (BW) is an R/3-independent SAP R/3Enterprise for extracting data from diverse source systems, both SAP andnon-SAP R/3 Enterprises. This restructures the data and compiles it intoanalyses, and presents these accordingly.

The heart of this is the SAP BW server, which is pre-configured with thebusiness content for the various core areas of the company.

Business content refers to pre-configured role- and task-based informationmodels based on consistent metadata. The business content provides a rangeof information for selected roles in a company, which they need to performtheir tasks.

The Business Explorer provides companies with flexible reporting andanalysis tools for strategic analysis and to support the decision-makingprocesses, such as queries, which include enquiries/analysis.

Figure 161: BW at a Glance

In the first step, data is prepared in various source systems and extracted.

In the second step, this data is compiled into info cubes in the BW. Info cubesare structures that describe a self-contained dataset of a business area from areporting perspective.

In the third step, queries, such as enquiries and analysis are defined on thebasis of the info cubes in the Business Explorer.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Business Content ALM

Figure 162: Business Content � Info Cubes for Asset Lifecycle Management

The Info Cubes for Plant Maintenance and Customer Service are listed in thegraphic shown above.

� Install/Dismantle equipment� Notification analysis technical objects� Damage analysis notifications� Cause analysis notifications� Tasks in notification� Actions in notifications� Maintenance orders� Maintenance orders - operations� Planned/Actual costs variation



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Lesson: Evaluations based on Business Information Warehouse

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Define Business Information Warehouse Architecture (BW)� Explain Business Content Asset Lifecycle Management (ALM)



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Unit Summary PLM300

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Define Evaluation steps� Explain Usage Lists� Explain Logistics Information System (LIS)� Specify the scope of standard analysis and reports� Define Business Information Warehouse Architecture (BW)� Explain Business Content Asset Lifecycle Management (ALM)



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Test Your Knowledge

1. The maintenance manager can also use the BW (Business InformationWarehouse) to perform system-wide evaluations.Determine whether this statement is true or false.

TrueFalse

2. The usage list displays all the pieces of equipment that have beeninstalled in chronological order.Determine whether this statement is true or false.

TrueFalse

3. Information structures are special statistical tables that contain basicdata from different applications.Determine whether this statement is true or false.

TrueFalse

4. The drill-down function is used for standard analyses.Determine whether this statement is true or false.

TrueFalse

5. Cause analysis notification can be queried for Asset LifecycleManagement.Determine whether this statement is true or false.

TrueFalse

6. Queries for ALM include installing and dismantling equipment.Determine whether this statement is true or false.

TrueFalse



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Answers

1. The maintenance manager can also use the BW (Business InformationWarehouse) to perform system-wide evaluations.

Answer: True

The maintenance manager can also use the BW (Business InformationWarehouse) to perform system-wide evaluations.

2. The usage list displays all the pieces of equipment that have beeninstalled in chronological order.

Answer: True

The usage list displays all the pieces of equipment that have beeninstalled in chronological order.

3. Information structures are special statistical tables that contain basicdata from different applications.

Answer: True

Information structures are special statistical tables that contain basicdata from different applications.

4. The drill-down function is used for standard analyses.

Answer: True

The drill-down function is used for standard analyses.

5. Cause analysis notification can be queried for Asset LifecycleManagement.

Answer: True

Cause analysis notification can be queried for Asset LifecycleManagement.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


6. Queries for ALM include installing and dismantling equipment.

Answer: True

Amongst other things, queries for ALM include installing anddismantling equipment.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Course Summary PLM300

Course SummaryYou should now be able to:

� Apply the various business processes of Plant Maintenance effectively� Identify Plant Maintenance as an integral part of Product Lifecycle

Management



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Appendix 1Plant Maintenance: Solution Manager, Technology,

and Transaction Codes

Solution Manager: Implementation and Monitoring

� Is SAP�s new technical infrastructure to realize your solutionmanagement� Is a free-of-charge technical add-on component� Is connected to all of the systems and components that you want to

manage in your entire solution landscape� Should be installed on top of an SAP Web AS 6.10


I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Appendix 1: Plant Maintenance: Solution Manager, Technology, and Transaction Codes PLM300

Figure 163: SAP Solution Manager �Architecture

� �Living� documentation

� Graphical representation� Framework and technical infrastructure for service delivery

� On-Site (Consulting), Remote, Self Services� Central monitoring platform

� Service Level Management, System Monitoring, Business ProcessMonitoring, Central System Administration

� Central platform for accessing all relevant information from SAP ServiceMarketplace

� SAP Service Marketplace� Central integration of service and support tools

� SAP Note Assistant, Microsoft NetMeeting, Support Desk,...



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Appendix 1: Plant Maintenance: Solution Manager, Technology, and Transaction Codes

Technology

Figure 164: R/3 Enterprise

SAP R/3 Enterprise Core is the next version after SAP R/3 4.6C. Allinfrastructure improvements (such as performance optimization) and legallyrequired changes are made in this area. Additional enhancements for R/3Enterprise in the areas of technology and infrastructure include the packageconcept, global parametrization with business configuration sets, Unicodecompliance, and Accessibility.

New functional developments covering enterprise-centric business processes,are made in the SAP R/3 Enterprise Extensions, which are encapsulatedobjects. They are selectively deployable and have their own release cycles.

From a technical perspective, the newest version of mySAP Technology wastaken as the foundation for SAP R/3 Enterprise. Specifically, this isWEB AS6.20. This includes all existing SAP Basis technologies and new features ofthe SAP Web AS. SAP Web provides a homogeneous infrastructure for bothJAVA and ABAP-based applications. It provides integration services andconnectivity both to the portal infrastructure and the exchange infrastructure.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 165: SAP Web Application Server (Web AS)

SAP Web Application Server adds the following functionality to the existingR/3 basis:

� Native Internet� SOAP, XML� Open integration� Web services� JAVA and J2EE� Webflow� Additional security functions� New upgrade tools

These new features are combined in the Internet Communication Manager(ICM). The ICM enables an SAP Enterprise to communicate with the internetvia HTTP, HTTPS, and SMTP.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 166: Enterprise Portal

The Enterprise Portal consists of the following three main components:

Portal Server

The Portal Server provides an environment for the development andadministration of portal content (roles, iViews) and for the user administration.

Knowledge Management

The Knowledge Management platform provides functions for theadministration and retrieval of structured and unstructured data.

Unification Server

The Unification Server allows the integration of heterogeneous systems into asingle source of information. The main component of the Unification Server isthe Drag and technology. This technology enables the user to drag a visualelement (for example, an order kept in an SAP Enterprise) to another visualelement (for example, a transport company kept in a non-SAP Enterprise) andthus relate the two elements to each other. The result could be the currentstatus of the order retrieved from a non-SAP Enterprise. The advantage of thistechnology is that it is easy to use and that the existing system landscape canbe used as it is.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Figure 167: Exchange Infrastructure (XI)

The aim of the Exchange Infrastructure is to build business processes acrossdifferent systems on different platforms.

The integration of the various systems (SAP and non-SAP) is based on openstandards such as HTTP and XML.

The heart of the Exchange Infrastructure is the Integration Enginewhich linkssystems using XML-based messages.



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Process Overview with Transaction Codes

Figure 168: Technology, Solutions, and mySAP.com (1)

Figure 169: Technology, Solutions, and mySAP.com (2)



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


MenuPath and Transactions

Step Transaction Menu Path

Display work center IR03 SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Maintenance Processing→ Environment→WorkCenters→ Work Center→ Display


Change equipment IE02 SAPmenu→ Logistics→ PlantMaintenance→Management ofTechnical Objects→ Equipment→ Change

Create equipment IE01 SAPmenu→ Logistics→ PlantMaintenance→Management ofTechnical Objects→ Equipment→ Create

Display equipment IE03 SAPmenu→ Logistics→ PlantMaintenance→Management ofTechnical Objects→ Equipment→ Display

Equipment listediting IE05

IE08

SAPmenu→ Logistics→ PlantMaintenance→Management ofTechnical Objects→ Equipment→ List Editing→ Change→Display

Display materialBOM

CS03 SAPmenu→ Logistics→ PlantMaintenance→Managementof Technical Objects→ Bills ofMaterial→Material BOM→Display

Change functionallocation

IL02 SAPmenu→ Logistics→ PlantMaintenance→Management ofTechnical Objects→ FunctionalLocation→ Change



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y



Create functionallocation

IL01 SAPmenu→ Logistics→ PlantMaintenance→Management ofTechnical Objects→ FunctionalLocation→ Create

Display functionallocation

IL03 SAPmenu→ Logistics→ PlantMaintenance→Management ofTechnical Objects→ FunctionalLocation→ Display

Functional locationlist editing IL05

IL06

SAPmenu→ Logistics→ PlantMaintenance→Management ofTechnical Objects→ FunctionalLocation→ Change→ Display

Functional locationstructural display

IH01 SAPmenu→ Logistics→ PlantMaintenance→Management ofTechnical Objects→ FunctionalLocation→ Structural Display


Display catalog QS42 SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Maintenance Processing→ Environment →Catalog→ Display

Create order IW31 SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Maintenance Processing→ Order → Create(General)

Change order IW32 SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Maintenance Processing→ Order→ Change

Display order IW33 SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Maintenance Processing→ Order→ Display



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y



Order list editing IW38

IW39

IW40

SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Maintenance Processing→ Order→ Order List→ Change→ Display→Display (Multi-Level)

Overall CompletionConfirmationIW42

SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→ MaintenanceProcessing→ CompletionConfirmation → Entry→ Overall CompletionConfirmation


Create malfunctionreport

IW24 SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Maintenance Processing→ Notification→ Create(Special)→MalfunctionReport

Create maintenancerequest

IW26 SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Maintenance Processing→ Notification→ Create(Special)→MaintenanceRequest

Create activity report IW25 SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Maintenance Processing→ Notification→ Create(Special) → ActivityReport

Change notification IW22 SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Maintenance Processing→ Notification→ Change



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y



Display notification IW23 SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Maintenance Processing→Notification→Display

Notification list editing IW28

IW29

IW30

SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Maintenance Processing→ Notification → ListEditing → Change →Display → Display(Multi-Level)

Notification - list ofactivities

IW64 SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Maintenance Processing→ Notification→ List ofActivities→ Change

Notification - list ofitems

IW68 SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Maintenance Processing→ Notification→ List ofItems→ Change

Create order IW31 SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Maintenance Processing→ Order → Create(General)





I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y




IW39

IW40

SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Maintenance Processing→ Order→ List Editing→ Change→ Display→Display (Multi-Level)

Overall CompletionConfirmation

IW42 SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→ MaintenanceProcessing→ CompletionConfirmation → Entry→ Overall CompletionConfirmation

Time confirmation �individual entry

IW41 SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→ MaintenanceProcessing→ CompletionConfirmation → Entry→ Individual TimeConfirmation

Time confirmation �collective entry withselection

IW48 SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→ MaintenanceProcessing→ CompletionConfirmation → Entry→ Collective TimeConfirmation → WithSelection

Time confirmation �collective confirmationwithout selection

IW44 SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→ MaintenanceProcessing→ CompletionConfirmation → Entry→ Collective TimeConfirmation→WithoutSelection



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Materials Management / Purchasing


Create purchase order ME21 / ME21N Logistics → MaterialsManagement →Purchasing→ PurchaseOrder → Create →Vendor/Supplying PlantKnown

Enter services ML81 SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→ MaintenanceProcessing→ CompletionConfirmation→ Services

Display material MM03 SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→ Technical Objects →Material→ Display

Goods movement MB11orMIGO SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→ MaintenanceProcessing→ CompletionConfirmation → GoodsMovement

Goods receipt MB31 or MIGO SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→ MaintenanceProcessing→ CompletionConfirmation → GoodsReceipt


Display material MM03 SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→ Technical Objects →Material→ Display



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y



Create refurbishmentorder

IW81 SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Maintenance Processing→ Order → Create(General)




IW39

IW40

SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Maintenance Processing→ Order→ List Editing→ Change→ Display→Display (Multi-Level)

Refurbishment goodsreceipt

IW8W SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→ MaintenanceProcessing→ CompletionConfirmation →Goods Movement →Refurbishment→ GoodsReceipt


Display equipmentplan

IA03 SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Preventive Maintenance→ Work Scheduling→ Task Lists → ForEquipment→ Display



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y



Display generalmaintenance task list

IA07 SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Preventive Maintenance→ Work Scheduling →Task Lists → GeneralMaintenance Task Lists→Display

Display functionallocation plan

IA13 SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Preventive Maintenance→ Work Scheduling→ Task Lists → ForFunctional Location →Display

Create single cycle plan IP41 SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Preventive Maintenance→Maintenance Planning→Maintenance Plans→Create → Single CyclePlan

Create strategy plan IP42 SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Preventive Maintenance→Maintenance Planning→Maintenance Plans→Create→ Strategy Plan



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y



Change maintenanceplan

IP02 SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Preventive Maintenance→Maintenance Planning→Maintenance Plans→Change

Display maintenanceplan

IP03 SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Preventive Maintenance→Maintenance Planning→Maintenance Plans→Display

Schedule maintenanceplan

IP10 SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Preventive Maintenance→Maintenance Planning→ Scheduling forMaintenance Plans →Schedule

Deadline monitoringfor maintenance plan

IP30 SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Preventive Maintenance→Maintenance Planning→ Scheduling forMaintenance Plans →Deadline Monitoring

Change maintenancestrategy

IP11 SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Preventive Maintenance→ MaintenancePlanning→MaintenanceStrategies→ Change



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Display maintenancestrategy

IP12 SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Preventive Maintenance→ MaintenancePlanning→MaintenanceStrategies→ Display

Graphic maintenanceschedule overview

IP19 SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Preventive Maintenance→Maintenance Planning→ Scheduling forMaintenance Plans →Scheduling Overview→Graphical

Maintenance scheduleoverview list

IP24 SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Preventive Maintenance→Maintenance Planning→ Scheduling forMaintenance Plans →Scheduling Overview→List


Display workbreakdown structure

CJ03 SAP menu→ Logistics→Project System→ Project→ Special MaintenanceFunctions → WorkBreakdown Structure(WBS)→ Display

Structure overview ofthe project

CN41 SAP menu → Logistics→ Project System →Information System →Structures→ StructureOverview



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y



Work ClearanceManagement

SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→ Work ClearanceManagement


Material where-usedlist

IW13 SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→Maintenance Processing→ History → MaterialWhere-Used List

Standard analyses→ Object Class →Manufacturer→ Location→ Planner Group →Damage Analysis →Object Statistics →Breakdown Analysis →Cost analysis→ Vehicleconsumption analysis

MCI1

MCI2

MCI3

MCI4

MCI5

MCI6

MCI7

MCI8

MCIZ

SAP menu → Logistics→ Plant Maintenance→ Information System→ Standard Analyses→ Object Class →Manufacturer→ Location→ Planner Group →Damage Analysis →Object Statistics →Breakdown Analysis →Cost analysis→ VehicleConsumption Analysis

Data Sheet for the Exercise: Organizational Structures inPlant Maintenance System

Description Training System IDES

General

Controlling area 1000 1000

Company code 1000 1000

Plant 1000 1000



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y



Storage location 0001 0001

Purchasingorganization

1000 1000

G/L account 417000 417000

Vendors 1000, 1101, 1102 SRV-1 1000

Technical Objects

Equipment TEQ-## P-1000-N001

Equipment withsynchronizationSerial number andmaterial/constructiontype synchronous

TEX-## -

Inspection equipment 10003540, 10003541 10003540, 10003541

Equipment withequipment BOM

T-SM0100 T-SM0120

Configurableequipment

P-6000-N001 P-6000-N001

Functional Locations C1

## (*)

SERV-PRO-RZ-##

C1

SERV-PRO-RZ-##

Operating hourscounter for FL →C1-M01-2, C1-M01-3,C1-M02-2, C1-M02-3

Created during course

Status profile forequipment

PMSTAT

Materials and Bills ofMaterial



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y



Materials:

Pump without serialnumber - standardprice for batch

Pump with serialnumber - standardprice for batch

Pump with serialnumber - movingaverage price for batch

Material withserial profile PM2(equipment/serialnumber synchronous)

Pump without serialnumber - movingaverage price for batch

T-FP1##

T-FP2##

T-FP3##

T-FP400

T-FP9##

P-2001

P-2002

P-2003

-

P-2009

Material withcondition-basedvaluation

(standard pricevaluation)

P-2001 P-2001

Serial number profile

(stock check = 1 →warning)

Equipment/Serialnumber synchronous

PM1

PM2

PM1

-

Configurable material P-6000 P-6000

Bill of material formaterial P-6000

P-6000 P-6000



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y



Materials for materialBOM P-1000 (plant1000, link 4)

100-00

100-400

DG-1000

100-600

100-431

KR117185

WL-1000

G-1000

M-1000

100-100

100-400

DG-1000

100-600

100-431

KR117185

WL-1000

G-1000

M-1000

Materials forequipment BOM

T-SM0100

T-SM0120

(plant 1200, link 4)

DPC9021

C-1112

R-1120

R-1131

R-1160

DPC9021

C-1112

R-1120

R-1131

R-1160

Configurable material(service)

INSPECTION_SERVICE

Work centers

Work centers T-ME##

T-EL##

T-EX##

Mechanics

Electrics

Task lists andMaintenancePlanning

Task lists PUMP_WTG PUMP_REPMM-CALIB

PUMP_WTGPUMP_REPMM-CALIB

Profile 0000001 0000001

Maintenance plansService procurementPM/QM link

50 600000000000 51, 52 50 600000000000 51, 52



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y



Performance-basedmaintenance strategy

DFL DFL

Cycle set ZS ZS

Configurable generaltask list for WPLin connectionwith configurableequipment

PUMP_WTG 6 PUMP_WTG 6 (oldstatus)

Maintenance planwith configurableequipment andconfigurable generaltask list

Maintenance plan 80

Notification and orderprocessing

Service masters 100131, 100132 100131, 100132

Order type forgenerating inspectionlot

PM06 PM06

Control key forinternal processingof service

PM05 PM05

Standard text keys PM00001 - PM00008 PM00001 - PM00008

Settlement profile forrefurbishment (fororder type PM04)

PM_AWA

Order type forinvestment orders

PM07

Service masters forinternal serviceprocessing (controlkey PM05)

100020, 100021

Cost centers and activitytypes



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y



Cost centersInstallation oftechnical systemsExternal company

4300

4110

4350

4300

4110

4350

Activity types 1410 (rep. hrs)

1610 (external hrs)

1410 (rep. hrs)

1610 (external hrs)

Allocation costelement for activitytype 1610

Outline agreements /framework orders

Outline agreementPipe laying work(vendor 1101)

4600000024 4600000024

Framework order forservices

4500006496 4500006496

Service

Maintenance contract

Configurable material(service)

INSPECTION_SER-VICE

Sold-to party 1171

Classes

Variant class (used inconfigurable equipmentand configurablegeneral task list)

CL_P600 CL_P600

Project and investmentprogram

Project I/5001 I/5001



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y


Plant Maintenanceproject profile

PM00001 PM00001

Investment program PM-INV PM-INV



I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

IndexAABAP List Viewer, 138Address Management, 156Application toolbar, 6Asset Lifecycle Management(ALM), 34

Average Price, 283BBilling Document, 239Bills of Materials (BOM), 90BOM Types, 90Breakdown MaintenanceOrders, 105

Breakdown MaintenanceProcess, 103

Business content, 401Business Explorer, 401Business InformationWarehouse (BW), 401

(Business InformationWarehouse) BW, 401

CCatalogs, 135Checkboxes, 6client, 2client system, 2Command field, 6Confirm Orders, 237Controlling (CO), 394Corrective MaintenanceCycle, 176

Corrective MaintenanceProcess, 128

Cost Analysis, 157

Cost Update, 245Cross-plant planning, 42Customizing, 47DData Scheduling, 323Delta Printing, 183Direct Catalog Access, 155Dismantling Equipment, 81EEnterprise BuyerProfessional (EBP), 154

Equipment, 78Equipment Installation, 81Equipment Master Record,79

Equipment Usage List, 82Evaluations, 385External operation deliverydelivered (EODL), 234

External operation partiallydelivered (EOPD), 234

External Services, 230FFavorites list, 5Functional LocationStructure, 69

Functional Locations, 64GGlossary, 11HHeader Level, 375Help menu, 11


I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Index PLM300

IImplementation Guide(IMG), 46

Individual Entry Function,118

Individual Purchase Process,232

Info Cubes for AssetLifecycle Management,402

Info Cubes for PlantMaintenance, 402

Information structures, 392Input options, 7Invoice Verification, 235KKeyboard Shortcuts, 11LLog Onto SAP R/3Enterprise, 2

Logistics InformationSystems (LIS), 390

MMaintenance BOM, 91Maintenance History, 385Maintenance Item, 323Maintenance Notification,105

Maintenance Order Creation,148

Maintenance OrderElements, 149

Maintenance OrderPlanning, 147

Maintenance Package, 327Maintenance PlanScheduling, 345

Maintenance Plants, 41Maintenance ProcessingInstruments, 106

Maintenance ProjectStructure, 367

Maintenance Schedule List,347

Maintenance Strategy, 328Maintenance Task Lists, 317Maintenance Types, 33Maintenance Work Centers,43

Master Record, 68Material Availability List,178

Material BOM, 92Material Master, 280Material Valuation, 282Material where-used list, 387Material Withdrawal, 197Menu bar, 6Mobile Engine, 264Model Service Specifications,241

Multi-level Order Lists, 180NNon-Stock Material, 153Notification History, 386Notification Objects, 133Notification Selection, 137Notification Structure, 132Notifications Creation, 131OObject List, 151Online help, 11Online Mobile Solutions, 263Operation List, 324Operations, 150Order Execution, 196Order History, 386Order Printing, 181Order Release, 181Order Scheduling, 176Order Selection, 179


I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

PLM300 Index

Organizational Structures, 41Organizational Units, 40Outsourcing, 231PParameter ID, 19Personal Default Values, 19Planned Cycle Date, 346Plant Maintenance (PM)Component, 40

Plant MaintenanceInformation System(PMIS), 390

Plant-specific planning, 42(PM-WCM), 374Preventive MaintenanceProcess, 313

Preventive MaintenanceTypes, 313

Product LifecycleManagement (PLM),34

Project Definition, 367Project Plan, 367Project-OrientedMaintenance, 367

Purchase Order, 232Purchase Requisition, 243Put in Process, 107RRadio buttons, 6Refurbishment order, 284Refurbishment Process, 279Resource Planning, 177Role, 5Role-Based User Menu, 5SSAP Easy Access, 4SAPGraphical User Interface(SAP GUI), 54

SAP Help Portal, 12SAP Library, 12

SAP Logon program, 4SAP Portals, 54SAP R/3 Enterprise ScreenElements, 6

SAP R/3 Interface, 2SAP Solutions, 34search_sap_menu, 7Service Entry Sheet, 244Service Items, 242Service Master Record, 240Service Procurement, 240Shutdown Project, 368Single Cycle Plan, 323Standard analyses, 393Standard Report in CO, 394Standard toolbar, 6Standing Orders, 237Status bar, 6Stock, 285Stock Material, 152Structure Indicator, 67TTab page, 6Task List Structure, 318Technical Completion, 118Technical Objects, 64Technically Completed(TECO), 118

Time Confirmations, 118Time-based Strategy Plan,326

Title bar, 6Transaction code, 7UUsage List, 385User-SpecificPersonalization, 19

VValuation Category, 280Valuation Type, 280


I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

Index PLM300

WWBS Elements, 367WCM Relevant Orders, 375Wireless Applications, 263Work Breakdown Structure(WBS), 367

Work Clearance Document,378

Work ClearanceManagement, 374

Work ClearanceManagement: Process,376�377


I n t

e r

n a

l

U s

e

S A

P

P a

r t

n e

r

O n

l y I n

t e r n a l U

s e S A

P P

a r t n e r O

n l y

FeedbackSAP AG has made every effort in the preparation of this course to ensure theaccuracy and completeness of the materials. If you have any corrections orsuggestions for improvement, please record them in the appropriate place inthe course evaluation.


PLM300 Plant Maintenance C

Documents

postal codecity

electric supply

repairedrefurbished

floating average

moving average

asset lifecycle

plantstorage

significant